]> code.delx.au - gnu-emacs/blob - doc/lispref/display.texi
Document 'pre-redisplay-functions'
[gnu-emacs] / doc / lispref / display.texi
1 @c -*- mode: texinfo; coding: utf-8 -*-
2 @c This is part of the GNU Emacs Lisp Reference Manual.
3 @c Copyright (C) 1990-1995, 1998-2016 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
4 @c See the file elisp.texi for copying conditions.
5 @node Display
6 @chapter Emacs Display
7
8 This chapter describes a number of features related to the display
9 that Emacs presents to the user.
10
11 @menu
12 * Refresh Screen:: Clearing the screen and redrawing everything on it.
13 * Forcing Redisplay:: Forcing redisplay.
14 * Truncation:: Folding or wrapping long text lines.
15 * The Echo Area:: Displaying messages at the bottom of the screen.
16 * Warnings:: Displaying warning messages for the user.
17 * Invisible Text:: Hiding part of the buffer text.
18 * Selective Display:: Hiding part of the buffer text (the old way).
19 * Temporary Displays:: Displays that go away automatically.
20 * Overlays:: Use overlays to highlight parts of the buffer.
21 * Size of Displayed Text:: How large displayed text is.
22 * Line Height:: Controlling the height of lines.
23 * Faces:: A face defines a graphics style for text characters:
24 font, colors, etc.
25 * Fringes:: Controlling window fringes.
26 * Scroll Bars:: Controlling scroll bars.
27 * Window Dividers:: Separating windows visually.
28 * Display Property:: Enabling special display features.
29 * Images:: Displaying images in Emacs buffers.
30 * Buttons:: Adding clickable buttons to Emacs buffers.
31 * Abstract Display:: Emacs's Widget for Object Collections.
32 * Blinking:: How Emacs shows the matching open parenthesis.
33 * Character Display:: How Emacs displays individual characters.
34 * Beeping:: Audible signal to the user.
35 * Window Systems:: Which window system is being used.
36 * Bidirectional Display:: Display of bidirectional scripts, such as
37 Arabic and Farsi.
38 @end menu
39
40 @node Refresh Screen
41 @section Refreshing the Screen
42 @cindex refresh the screen
43 @cindex screen refresh
44
45 The function @code{redraw-frame} clears and redisplays the entire
46 contents of a given frame (@pxref{Frames}). This is useful if the
47 screen is corrupted.
48
49 @defun redraw-frame frame
50 This function clears and redisplays frame @var{frame}.
51 @end defun
52
53 Even more powerful is @code{redraw-display}:
54
55 @deffn Command redraw-display
56 This function clears and redisplays all visible frames.
57 @end deffn
58
59 In Emacs, processing user input takes priority over redisplay. If
60 you call these functions when input is available, they don't redisplay
61 immediately, but the requested redisplay does happen
62 eventually---after all the input has been processed.
63
64 On text terminals, suspending and resuming Emacs normally also
65 refreshes the screen. Some terminal emulators record separate
66 contents for display-oriented programs such as Emacs and for ordinary
67 sequential display. If you are using such a terminal, you might want
68 to inhibit the redisplay on resumption.
69
70 @defopt no-redraw-on-reenter
71 @cindex suspend (cf. @code{no-redraw-on-reenter})
72 @cindex resume (cf. @code{no-redraw-on-reenter})
73 This variable controls whether Emacs redraws the entire screen after it
74 has been suspended and resumed. Non-@code{nil} means there is no need
75 to redraw, @code{nil} means redrawing is needed. The default is @code{nil}.
76 @end defopt
77
78 @node Forcing Redisplay
79 @section Forcing Redisplay
80 @cindex forcing redisplay
81
82 Emacs normally tries to redisplay the screen whenever it waits for
83 input. With the following function, you can request an immediate
84 attempt to redisplay, in the middle of Lisp code, without actually
85 waiting for input.
86
87 @defun redisplay &optional force
88 This function tries immediately to redisplay. The optional argument
89 @var{force}, if non-@code{nil}, forces the redisplay to be performed,
90 instead of being preempted if input is pending.
91
92 The function returns @code{t} if it actually tried to redisplay, and
93 @code{nil} otherwise. A value of @code{t} does not mean that
94 redisplay proceeded to completion; it could have been preempted by
95 newly arriving input.
96 @end defun
97
98 Although @code{redisplay} tries immediately to redisplay, it does
99 not change how Emacs decides which parts of its frame(s) to redisplay.
100 By contrast, the following function adds certain windows to the
101 pending redisplay work (as if their contents had completely changed),
102 but does not immediately try to perform redisplay.
103
104 @defun force-window-update &optional object
105 This function forces some or all windows to be updated the next time
106 Emacs does a redisplay. If @var{object} is a window, that window is
107 to be updated. If @var{object} is a buffer or buffer name, all
108 windows displaying that buffer are to be updated. If @var{object} is
109 @code{nil} (or omitted), all windows are to be updated.
110
111 This function does not do a redisplay immediately; Emacs does that as
112 it waits for input, or when the function @code{redisplay} is called.
113 @end defun
114
115 @defvar pre-redisplay-function
116 A function run just before redisplay. It is called with one argument,
117 the set of windows to be redisplayed. The set can be @code{nil},
118 meaning only the selected window, or @code{t}, meaning all the
119 windows.
120 @end defvar
121
122 @defvar pre-redisplay-functions
123 This hook is run just before redisplay. It is called once in each
124 window that is about to be redisplayed, with @code{current-buffer} set
125 to the buffer displayed in that window.
126 @end defvar
127
128 @node Truncation
129 @section Truncation
130 @cindex line wrapping
131 @cindex line truncation
132 @cindex continuation lines
133 @cindex @samp{$} in display
134 @cindex @samp{\} in display
135
136 When a line of text extends beyond the right edge of a window, Emacs
137 can @dfn{continue} the line (make it wrap to the next screen
138 line), or @dfn{truncate} the line (limit it to one screen line). The
139 additional screen lines used to display a long text line are called
140 @dfn{continuation} lines. Continuation is not the same as filling;
141 continuation happens on the screen only, not in the buffer contents,
142 and it breaks a line precisely at the right margin, not at a word
143 boundary. @xref{Filling}.
144
145 On a graphical display, tiny arrow images in the window fringes
146 indicate truncated and continued lines (@pxref{Fringes}). On a text
147 terminal, a @samp{$} in the rightmost column of the window indicates
148 truncation; a @samp{\} on the rightmost column indicates a line that
149 wraps. (The display table can specify alternate characters to use
150 for this; @pxref{Display Tables}).
151
152 @defopt truncate-lines
153 If this buffer-local variable is non-@code{nil}, lines that extend
154 beyond the right edge of the window are truncated; otherwise, they are
155 continued. As a special exception, the variable
156 @code{truncate-partial-width-windows} takes precedence in
157 @dfn{partial-width} windows (i.e., windows that do not occupy the
158 entire frame width).
159 @end defopt
160
161 @defopt truncate-partial-width-windows
162 @cindex partial-width windows
163 This variable controls line truncation in @dfn{partial-width} windows.
164 A partial-width window is one that does not occupy the entire frame
165 width (@pxref{Splitting Windows}). If the value is @code{nil}, line
166 truncation is determined by the variable @code{truncate-lines} (see
167 above). If the value is an integer @var{n}, lines are truncated if
168 the partial-width window has fewer than @var{n} columns, regardless of
169 the value of @code{truncate-lines}; if the partial-width window has
170 @var{n} or more columns, line truncation is determined by
171 @code{truncate-lines}. For any other non-@code{nil} value, lines are
172 truncated in every partial-width window, regardless of the value of
173 @code{truncate-lines}.
174 @end defopt
175
176 When horizontal scrolling (@pxref{Horizontal Scrolling}) is in use in
177 a window, that forces truncation.
178
179 @defvar wrap-prefix
180 If this buffer-local variable is non-@code{nil}, it defines a
181 @dfn{wrap prefix} which Emacs displays at the start of every
182 continuation line. (If lines are truncated, @code{wrap-prefix} is
183 never used.) Its value may be a string or an image (@pxref{Other
184 Display Specs}), or a stretch of whitespace such as specified by the
185 @code{:width} or @code{:align-to} display properties (@pxref{Specified
186 Space}). The value is interpreted in the same way as a @code{display}
187 text property. @xref{Display Property}.
188
189 A wrap prefix may also be specified for regions of text, using the
190 @code{wrap-prefix} text or overlay property. This takes precedence
191 over the @code{wrap-prefix} variable. @xref{Special Properties}.
192 @end defvar
193
194 @defvar line-prefix
195 If this buffer-local variable is non-@code{nil}, it defines a
196 @dfn{line prefix} which Emacs displays at the start of every
197 non-continuation line. Its value may be a string or an image
198 (@pxref{Other Display Specs}), or a stretch of whitespace such as
199 specified by the @code{:width} or @code{:align-to} display properties
200 (@pxref{Specified Space}). The value is interpreted in the same way
201 as a @code{display} text property. @xref{Display Property}.
202
203 A line prefix may also be specified for regions of text using the
204 @code{line-prefix} text or overlay property. This takes precedence
205 over the @code{line-prefix} variable. @xref{Special Properties}.
206 @end defvar
207
208 @ignore
209 If your buffer contains only very short lines, you might find it
210 advisable to set @code{cache-long-scans} to @code{nil}.
211
212 @defvar cache-long-scans
213 If this variable is non-@code{nil} (the default), various indentation
214 and motion functions, and Emacs redisplay, cache the results of
215 scanning the buffer, and consult the cache to avoid rescanning regions
216 of the buffer unless they are modified.
217
218 Turning off the cache speeds up processing of short lines somewhat.
219
220 This variable is automatically buffer-local in every buffer.
221 @end defvar
222 @end ignore
223
224 @node The Echo Area
225 @section The Echo Area
226 @cindex error display
227 @cindex echo area
228
229 @c FIXME: Why not use @xref{Minibuffers} directly? --xfq
230 The @dfn{echo area} is used for displaying error messages
231 (@pxref{Errors}), for messages made with the @code{message} primitive,
232 and for echoing keystrokes. It is not the same as the minibuffer,
233 despite the fact that the minibuffer appears (when active) in the same
234 place on the screen as the echo area. @xref{Minibuffer,, The
235 Minibuffer, emacs, The GNU Emacs Manual}.
236
237 Apart from the functions documented in this section, you can print
238 Lisp objects to the echo area by specifying @code{t} as the output
239 stream. @xref{Output Streams}.
240
241 @menu
242 * Displaying Messages:: Explicitly displaying text in the echo area.
243 * Progress:: Informing user about progress of a long operation.
244 * Logging Messages:: Echo area messages are logged for the user.
245 * Echo Area Customization:: Controlling the echo area.
246 @end menu
247
248 @node Displaying Messages
249 @subsection Displaying Messages in the Echo Area
250 @cindex display message in echo area
251
252 This section describes the standard functions for displaying
253 messages in the echo area.
254
255 @defun message format-string &rest arguments
256 This function displays a message in the echo area.
257 @var{format-string} is a format string, and @var{arguments} are the
258 objects for its format specifications, like in the @code{format-message}
259 function (@pxref{Formatting Strings}). The resulting formatted string
260 is displayed in the echo area; if it contains @code{face} text
261 properties, it is displayed with the specified faces (@pxref{Faces}).
262 The string is also added to the @file{*Messages*} buffer, but without
263 text properties (@pxref{Logging Messages}).
264
265 In a format string containing single quotes, curved quotes @t{‘like
266 this’} and grave quotes @t{`like this'} work better than straight
267 quotes @t{'like this'}, as @code{message} typically formats every
268 straight quote as a curved closing quote.
269
270 In batch mode, the message is printed to the standard error stream,
271 followed by a newline.
272
273 When @code{inhibit-message} is non-@code{nil}, no message will be displayed
274 in the echo area, it will only be logged to @samp{*Messages*}.
275
276 If @var{format-string} is @code{nil} or the empty string,
277 @code{message} clears the echo area; if the echo area has been
278 expanded automatically, this brings it back to its normal size. If
279 the minibuffer is active, this brings the minibuffer contents back
280 onto the screen immediately.
281
282 @example
283 @group
284 (message "Reverting `%s'..." (buffer-name))
285 @print{} Reverting ‘subr.el’...
286 @result{} "Reverting ‘subr.el’..."
287 @end group
288
289 @group
290 ---------- Echo Area ----------
291 Reverting ‘subr.el’...
292 ---------- Echo Area ----------
293 @end group
294 @end example
295
296 To automatically display a message in the echo area or in a pop-buffer,
297 depending on its size, use @code{display-message-or-buffer} (see below).
298
299 @strong{Warning:} If you want to use your own string as a message
300 verbatim, don't just write @code{(message @var{string})}. If
301 @var{string} contains @samp{%}, @samp{`}, or @samp{'} it may be
302 reformatted, with undesirable results. Instead, use @code{(message
303 "%s" @var{string})}.
304 @end defun
305
306 @defvar inhibit-message
307 When this variable is non-@code{nil}, @code{message} and related functions
308 will not use the Echo Area to display messages.
309 @end defvar
310
311 @defmac with-temp-message message &rest body
312 This construct displays a message in the echo area temporarily, during
313 the execution of @var{body}. It displays @var{message}, executes
314 @var{body}, then returns the value of the last body form while restoring
315 the previous echo area contents.
316 @end defmac
317
318 @defun message-or-box format-string &rest arguments
319 This function displays a message like @code{message}, but may display it
320 in a dialog box instead of the echo area. If this function is called in
321 a command that was invoked using the mouse---more precisely, if
322 @code{last-nonmenu-event} (@pxref{Command Loop Info}) is either
323 @code{nil} or a list---then it uses a dialog box or pop-up menu to
324 display the message. Otherwise, it uses the echo area. (This is the
325 same criterion that @code{y-or-n-p} uses to make a similar decision; see
326 @ref{Yes-or-No Queries}.)
327
328 You can force use of the mouse or of the echo area by binding
329 @code{last-nonmenu-event} to a suitable value around the call.
330 @end defun
331
332 @defun message-box format-string &rest arguments
333 @anchor{message-box}
334 This function displays a message like @code{message}, but uses a dialog
335 box (or a pop-up menu) whenever that is possible. If it is impossible
336 to use a dialog box or pop-up menu, because the terminal does not
337 support them, then @code{message-box} uses the echo area, like
338 @code{message}.
339 @end defun
340
341 @defun display-message-or-buffer message &optional buffer-name action frame
342 This function displays the message @var{message}, which may be either a
343 string or a buffer. If it is shorter than the maximum height of the
344 echo area, as defined by @code{max-mini-window-height}, it is displayed
345 in the echo area, using @code{message}. Otherwise,
346 @code{display-buffer} is used to show it in a pop-up buffer.
347
348 Returns either the string shown in the echo area, or when a pop-up
349 buffer is used, the window used to display it.
350
351 If @var{message} is a string, then the optional argument
352 @var{buffer-name} is the name of the buffer used to display it when a
353 pop-up buffer is used, defaulting to @file{*Message*}. In the case
354 where @var{message} is a string and displayed in the echo area, it is
355 not specified whether the contents are inserted into the buffer anyway.
356
357 The optional arguments @var{action} and @var{frame} are as for
358 @code{display-buffer}, and only used if a buffer is displayed.
359 @end defun
360
361 @defun current-message
362 This function returns the message currently being displayed in the
363 echo area, or @code{nil} if there is none.
364 @end defun
365
366 @node Progress
367 @subsection Reporting Operation Progress
368 @cindex progress reporting
369
370 When an operation can take a while to finish, you should inform the
371 user about the progress it makes. This way the user can estimate
372 remaining time and clearly see that Emacs is busy working, not hung.
373 A convenient way to do this is to use a @dfn{progress reporter}.
374
375 Here is a working example that does nothing useful:
376
377 @smallexample
378 (let ((progress-reporter
379 (make-progress-reporter "Collecting mana for Emacs..."
380 0 500)))
381 (dotimes (k 500)
382 (sit-for 0.01)
383 (progress-reporter-update progress-reporter k))
384 (progress-reporter-done progress-reporter))
385 @end smallexample
386
387 @defun make-progress-reporter message &optional min-value max-value current-value min-change min-time
388 This function creates and returns a progress reporter object, which
389 you will use as an argument for the other functions listed below. The
390 idea is to precompute as much data as possible to make progress
391 reporting very fast.
392
393 When this progress reporter is subsequently used, it will display
394 @var{message} in the echo area, followed by progress percentage.
395 @var{message} is treated as a simple string. If you need it to depend
396 on a filename, for instance, use @code{format-message} before calling this
397 function.
398
399 The arguments @var{min-value} and @var{max-value} should be numbers
400 standing for the starting and final states of the operation. For
401 instance, an operation that scans a buffer should set these to the
402 results of @code{point-min} and @code{point-max} correspondingly.
403 @var{max-value} should be greater than @var{min-value}.
404
405 Alternatively, you can set @var{min-value} and @var{max-value} to
406 @code{nil}. In that case, the progress reporter does not report
407 process percentages; it instead displays a ``spinner'' that rotates a
408 notch each time you update the progress reporter.
409
410 If @var{min-value} and @var{max-value} are numbers, you can give the
411 argument @var{current-value} a numerical value specifying the initial
412 progress; if omitted, this defaults to @var{min-value}.
413
414 The remaining arguments control the rate of echo area updates. The
415 progress reporter will wait for at least @var{min-change} more
416 percents of the operation to be completed before printing next
417 message; the default is one percent. @var{min-time} specifies the
418 minimum time in seconds to pass between successive prints; the default
419 is 0.2 seconds. (On some operating systems, the progress reporter may
420 handle fractions of seconds with varying precision).
421
422 This function calls @code{progress-reporter-update}, so the first
423 message is printed immediately.
424 @end defun
425
426 @defun progress-reporter-update reporter &optional value
427 This function does the main work of reporting progress of your
428 operation. It displays the message of @var{reporter}, followed by
429 progress percentage determined by @var{value}. If percentage is zero,
430 or close enough according to the @var{min-change} and @var{min-time}
431 arguments, then it is omitted from the output.
432
433 @var{reporter} must be the result of a call to
434 @code{make-progress-reporter}. @var{value} specifies the current
435 state of your operation and must be between @var{min-value} and
436 @var{max-value} (inclusive) as passed to
437 @code{make-progress-reporter}. For instance, if you scan a buffer,
438 then @var{value} should be the result of a call to @code{point}.
439
440 This function respects @var{min-change} and @var{min-time} as passed
441 to @code{make-progress-reporter} and so does not output new messages
442 on every invocation. It is thus very fast and normally you should not
443 try to reduce the number of calls to it: resulting overhead will most
444 likely negate your effort.
445 @end defun
446
447 @defun progress-reporter-force-update reporter &optional value new-message
448 This function is similar to @code{progress-reporter-update} except
449 that it prints a message in the echo area unconditionally.
450
451 The first two arguments have the same meaning as for
452 @code{progress-reporter-update}. Optional @var{new-message} allows
453 you to change the message of the @var{reporter}. Since this function
454 always updates the echo area, such a change will be immediately
455 presented to the user.
456 @end defun
457
458 @defun progress-reporter-done reporter
459 This function should be called when the operation is finished. It
460 prints the message of @var{reporter} followed by word @samp{done} in the
461 echo area.
462
463 You should always call this function and not hope for
464 @code{progress-reporter-update} to print @samp{100%}. Firstly, it may
465 never print it, there are many good reasons for this not to happen.
466 Secondly, @samp{done} is more explicit.
467 @end defun
468
469 @defmac dotimes-with-progress-reporter (var count [result]) message body@dots{}
470 This is a convenience macro that works the same way as @code{dotimes}
471 does, but also reports loop progress using the functions described
472 above. It allows you to save some typing.
473
474 You can rewrite the example in the beginning of this node using
475 this macro this way:
476
477 @example
478 (dotimes-with-progress-reporter
479 (k 500)
480 "Collecting some mana for Emacs..."
481 (sit-for 0.01))
482 @end example
483 @end defmac
484
485 @node Logging Messages
486 @subsection Logging Messages in @file{*Messages*}
487 @cindex logging echo-area messages
488
489 Almost all the messages displayed in the echo area are also recorded
490 in the @file{*Messages*} buffer so that the user can refer back to
491 them. This includes all the messages that are output with
492 @code{message}. By default, this buffer is read-only and uses the major
493 mode @code{messages-buffer-mode}. Nothing prevents the user from
494 killing the @file{*Messages*} buffer, but the next display of a message
495 recreates it. Any Lisp code that needs to access the
496 @file{*Messages*} buffer directly and wants to ensure that it exists
497 should use the function @code{messages-buffer}.
498
499 @defun messages-buffer
500 This function returns the @file{*Messages*} buffer. If it does not
501 exist, it creates it, and switches it to @code{messages-buffer-mode}.
502 @end defun
503
504 @defopt message-log-max
505 This variable specifies how many lines to keep in the @file{*Messages*}
506 buffer. The value @code{t} means there is no limit on how many lines to
507 keep. The value @code{nil} disables message logging entirely. Here's
508 how to display a message and prevent it from being logged:
509
510 @example
511 (let (message-log-max)
512 (message @dots{}))
513 @end example
514 @end defopt
515
516 To make @file{*Messages*} more convenient for the user, the logging
517 facility combines successive identical messages. It also combines
518 successive related messages for the sake of two cases: question
519 followed by answer, and a series of progress messages.
520
521 A question followed by an answer has two messages like the
522 ones produced by @code{y-or-n-p}: the first is @samp{@var{question}},
523 and the second is @samp{@var{question}...@var{answer}}. The first
524 message conveys no additional information beyond what's in the second,
525 so logging the second message discards the first from the log.
526
527 A series of progress messages has successive messages like
528 those produced by @code{make-progress-reporter}. They have the form
529 @samp{@var{base}...@var{how-far}}, where @var{base} is the same each
530 time, while @var{how-far} varies. Logging each message in the series
531 discards the previous one, provided they are consecutive.
532
533 The functions @code{make-progress-reporter} and @code{y-or-n-p}
534 don't have to do anything special to activate the message log
535 combination feature. It operates whenever two consecutive messages
536 are logged that share a common prefix ending in @samp{...}.
537
538 @node Echo Area Customization
539 @subsection Echo Area Customization
540 @cindex echo area customization
541
542 These variables control details of how the echo area works.
543
544 @defvar cursor-in-echo-area
545 This variable controls where the cursor appears when a message is
546 displayed in the echo area. If it is non-@code{nil}, then the cursor
547 appears at the end of the message. Otherwise, the cursor appears at
548 point---not in the echo area at all.
549
550 The value is normally @code{nil}; Lisp programs bind it to @code{t}
551 for brief periods of time.
552 @end defvar
553
554 @defvar echo-area-clear-hook
555 This normal hook is run whenever the echo area is cleared---either by
556 @code{(message nil)} or for any other reason.
557 @end defvar
558
559 @defopt echo-keystrokes
560 This variable determines how much time should elapse before command
561 characters echo. Its value must be a number, and specifies the
562 number of seconds to wait before echoing. If the user types a prefix
563 key (such as @kbd{C-x}) and then delays this many seconds before
564 continuing, the prefix key is echoed in the echo area. (Once echoing
565 begins in a key sequence, all subsequent characters in the same key
566 sequence are echoed immediately.)
567
568 If the value is zero, then command input is not echoed.
569 @end defopt
570
571 @defvar message-truncate-lines
572 Normally, displaying a long message resizes the echo area to display
573 the entire message. But if the variable @code{message-truncate-lines}
574 is non-@code{nil}, the echo area does not resize, and the message is
575 truncated to fit it.
576 @end defvar
577
578 The variable @code{max-mini-window-height}, which specifies the
579 maximum height for resizing minibuffer windows, also applies to the
580 echo area (which is really a special use of the minibuffer window;
581 @pxref{Minibuffer Misc}).
582
583 @node Warnings
584 @section Reporting Warnings
585 @cindex warnings
586
587 @dfn{Warnings} are a facility for a program to inform the user of a
588 possible problem, but continue running.
589
590 @menu
591 * Warning Basics:: Warnings concepts and functions to report them.
592 * Warning Variables:: Variables programs bind to customize their warnings.
593 * Warning Options:: Variables users set to control display of warnings.
594 * Delayed Warnings:: Deferring a warning until the end of a command.
595 @end menu
596
597 @node Warning Basics
598 @subsection Warning Basics
599 @cindex severity level
600
601 Every warning has a textual message, which explains the problem for
602 the user, and a @dfn{severity level} which is a symbol. Here are the
603 possible severity levels, in order of decreasing severity, and their
604 meanings:
605
606 @table @code
607 @item :emergency
608 A problem that will seriously impair Emacs operation soon
609 if you do not attend to it promptly.
610 @item :error
611 A report of data or circumstances that are inherently wrong.
612 @item :warning
613 A report of data or circumstances that are not inherently wrong, but
614 raise suspicion of a possible problem.
615 @item :debug
616 A report of information that may be useful if you are debugging.
617 @end table
618
619 When your program encounters invalid input data, it can either
620 signal a Lisp error by calling @code{error} or @code{signal} or report
621 a warning with severity @code{:error}. Signaling a Lisp error is the
622 easiest thing to do, but it means the program cannot continue
623 processing. If you want to take the trouble to implement a way to
624 continue processing despite the bad data, then reporting a warning of
625 severity @code{:error} is the right way to inform the user of the
626 problem. For instance, the Emacs Lisp byte compiler can report an
627 error that way and continue compiling other functions. (If the
628 program signals a Lisp error and then handles it with
629 @code{condition-case}, the user won't see the error message; it could
630 show the message to the user by reporting it as a warning.)
631
632 @c FIXME: Why use "(bytecomp)" instead of "'bytecomp" or simply
633 @c "bytecomp" here? The parens are part of warning-type-format but
634 @c not part of the warning type. --xfq
635 @cindex warning type
636 Each warning has a @dfn{warning type} to classify it. The type is a
637 list of symbols. The first symbol should be the custom group that you
638 use for the program's user options. For example, byte compiler
639 warnings use the warning type @code{(bytecomp)}. You can also
640 subcategorize the warnings, if you wish, by using more symbols in the
641 list.
642
643 @defun display-warning type message &optional level buffer-name
644 This function reports a warning, using @var{message} as the message
645 and @var{type} as the warning type. @var{level} should be the
646 severity level, with @code{:warning} being the default.
647
648 @var{buffer-name}, if non-@code{nil}, specifies the name of the buffer
649 for logging the warning. By default, it is @file{*Warnings*}.
650 @end defun
651
652 @defun lwarn type level message &rest args
653 This function reports a warning using the value of @code{(format-message
654 @var{message} @var{args}...)} as the message in the @file{*Warnings*}
655 buffer. In other respects it is equivalent to @code{display-warning}.
656 @end defun
657
658 @defun warn message &rest args
659 This function reports a warning using the value of @code{(format-message
660 @var{message} @var{args}...)} as the message, @code{(emacs)} as the
661 type, and @code{:warning} as the severity level. It exists for
662 compatibility only; we recommend not using it, because you should
663 specify a specific warning type.
664 @end defun
665
666 @node Warning Variables
667 @subsection Warning Variables
668 @cindex warning variables
669
670 Programs can customize how their warnings appear by binding
671 the variables described in this section.
672
673 @defvar warning-levels
674 This list defines the meaning and severity order of the warning
675 severity levels. Each element defines one severity level,
676 and they are arranged in order of decreasing severity.
677
678 Each element has the form @code{(@var{level} @var{string}
679 @var{function})}, where @var{level} is the severity level it defines.
680 @var{string} specifies the textual description of this level.
681 @var{string} should use @samp{%s} to specify where to put the warning
682 type information, or it can omit the @samp{%s} so as not to include
683 that information.
684
685 The optional @var{function}, if non-@code{nil}, is a function to call
686 with no arguments, to get the user's attention.
687
688 Normally you should not change the value of this variable.
689 @end defvar
690
691 @defvar warning-prefix-function
692 If non-@code{nil}, the value is a function to generate prefix text for
693 warnings. Programs can bind the variable to a suitable function.
694 @code{display-warning} calls this function with the warnings buffer
695 current, and the function can insert text in it. That text becomes
696 the beginning of the warning message.
697
698 The function is called with two arguments, the severity level and its
699 entry in @code{warning-levels}. It should return a list to use as the
700 entry (this value need not be an actual member of
701 @code{warning-levels}). By constructing this value, the function can
702 change the severity of the warning, or specify different handling for
703 a given severity level.
704
705 If the variable's value is @code{nil} then there is no function
706 to call.
707 @end defvar
708
709 @defvar warning-series
710 Programs can bind this variable to @code{t} to say that the next
711 warning should begin a series. When several warnings form a series,
712 that means to leave point on the first warning of the series, rather
713 than keep moving it for each warning so that it appears on the last one.
714 The series ends when the local binding is unbound and
715 @code{warning-series} becomes @code{nil} again.
716
717 The value can also be a symbol with a function definition. That is
718 equivalent to @code{t}, except that the next warning will also call
719 the function with no arguments with the warnings buffer current. The
720 function can insert text which will serve as a header for the series
721 of warnings.
722
723 Once a series has begun, the value is a marker which points to the
724 buffer position in the warnings buffer of the start of the series.
725
726 The variable's normal value is @code{nil}, which means to handle
727 each warning separately.
728 @end defvar
729
730 @defvar warning-fill-prefix
731 When this variable is non-@code{nil}, it specifies a fill prefix to
732 use for filling each warning's text.
733 @end defvar
734
735 @defvar warning-type-format
736 This variable specifies the format for displaying the warning type
737 in the warning message. The result of formatting the type this way
738 gets included in the message under the control of the string in the
739 entry in @code{warning-levels}. The default value is @code{" (%s)"}.
740 If you bind it to @code{""} then the warning type won't appear at
741 all.
742 @end defvar
743
744 @node Warning Options
745 @subsection Warning Options
746 @cindex warning options
747
748 These variables are used by users to control what happens
749 when a Lisp program reports a warning.
750
751 @defopt warning-minimum-level
752 This user option specifies the minimum severity level that should be
753 shown immediately to the user. The default is @code{:warning}, which
754 means to immediately display all warnings except @code{:debug}
755 warnings.
756 @end defopt
757
758 @defopt warning-minimum-log-level
759 This user option specifies the minimum severity level that should be
760 logged in the warnings buffer. The default is @code{:warning}, which
761 means to log all warnings except @code{:debug} warnings.
762 @end defopt
763
764 @defopt warning-suppress-types
765 This list specifies which warning types should not be displayed
766 immediately for the user. Each element of the list should be a list
767 of symbols. If its elements match the first elements in a warning
768 type, then that warning is not displayed immediately.
769 @end defopt
770
771 @defopt warning-suppress-log-types
772 This list specifies which warning types should not be logged in the
773 warnings buffer. Each element of the list should be a list of
774 symbols. If it matches the first few elements in a warning type, then
775 that warning is not logged.
776 @end defopt
777
778 @node Delayed Warnings
779 @subsection Delayed Warnings
780 @cindex delayed warnings
781
782 Sometimes, you may wish to avoid showing a warning while a command is
783 running, and only show it only after the end of the command. You can
784 use the variable @code{delayed-warnings-list} for this.
785
786 @defvar delayed-warnings-list
787 The value of this variable is a list of warnings to be displayed after
788 the current command has finished. Each element must be a list
789
790 @smallexample
791 (@var{type} @var{message} [@var{level} [@var{buffer-name}]])
792 @end smallexample
793
794 @noindent
795 with the same form, and the same meanings, as the argument list of
796 @code{display-warning} (@pxref{Warning Basics}). Immediately after
797 running @code{post-command-hook} (@pxref{Command Overview}), the Emacs
798 command loop displays all the warnings specified by this variable,
799 then resets it to @code{nil}.
800 @end defvar
801
802 Programs which need to further customize the delayed warnings
803 mechanism can change the variable @code{delayed-warnings-hook}:
804
805 @defvar delayed-warnings-hook
806 This is a normal hook which is run by the Emacs command loop, after
807 @code{post-command-hook}, in order to to process and display delayed
808 warnings.
809
810 Its default value is a list of two functions:
811
812 @smallexample
813 (collapse-delayed-warnings display-delayed-warnings)
814 @end smallexample
815
816 @findex collapse-delayed-warnings
817 @findex display-delayed-warnings
818 @noindent
819 The function @code{collapse-delayed-warnings} removes repeated entries
820 from @code{delayed-warnings-list}. The function
821 @code{display-delayed-warnings} calls @code{display-warning} on each
822 of the entries in @code{delayed-warnings-list}, in turn, and then sets
823 @code{delayed-warnings-list} to @code{nil}.
824 @end defvar
825
826 @node Invisible Text
827 @section Invisible Text
828
829 @cindex invisible text
830 You can make characters @dfn{invisible}, so that they do not appear on
831 the screen, with the @code{invisible} property. This can be either a
832 text property (@pxref{Text Properties}) or an overlay property
833 (@pxref{Overlays}). Cursor motion also partly ignores these
834 characters; if the command loop finds that point is inside a range of
835 invisible text after a command, it relocates point to the other side
836 of the text.
837
838 In the simplest case, any non-@code{nil} @code{invisible} property makes
839 a character invisible. This is the default case---if you don't alter
840 the default value of @code{buffer-invisibility-spec}, this is how the
841 @code{invisible} property works. You should normally use @code{t}
842 as the value of the @code{invisible} property if you don't plan
843 to set @code{buffer-invisibility-spec} yourself.
844
845 More generally, you can use the variable @code{buffer-invisibility-spec}
846 to control which values of the @code{invisible} property make text
847 invisible. This permits you to classify the text into different subsets
848 in advance, by giving them different @code{invisible} values, and
849 subsequently make various subsets visible or invisible by changing the
850 value of @code{buffer-invisibility-spec}.
851
852 Controlling visibility with @code{buffer-invisibility-spec} is
853 especially useful in a program to display the list of entries in a
854 database. It permits the implementation of convenient filtering
855 commands to view just a part of the entries in the database. Setting
856 this variable is very fast, much faster than scanning all the text in
857 the buffer looking for properties to change.
858
859 @defvar buffer-invisibility-spec
860 This variable specifies which kinds of @code{invisible} properties
861 actually make a character invisible. Setting this variable makes it
862 buffer-local.
863
864 @table @asis
865 @item @code{t}
866 A character is invisible if its @code{invisible} property is
867 non-@code{nil}. This is the default.
868
869 @item a list
870 Each element of the list specifies a criterion for invisibility; if a
871 character's @code{invisible} property fits any one of these criteria,
872 the character is invisible. The list can have two kinds of elements:
873
874 @table @code
875 @item @var{atom}
876 A character is invisible if its @code{invisible} property value is
877 @var{atom} or if it is a list with @var{atom} as a member; comparison
878 is done with @code{eq}.
879
880 @item (@var{atom} . t)
881 A character is invisible if its @code{invisible} property value is
882 @var{atom} or if it is a list with @var{atom} as a member; comparison
883 is done with @code{eq}. Moreover, a sequence of such characters
884 displays as an ellipsis.
885 @end table
886 @end table
887 @end defvar
888
889 Two functions are specifically provided for adding elements to
890 @code{buffer-invisibility-spec} and removing elements from it.
891
892 @defun add-to-invisibility-spec element
893 This function adds the element @var{element} to
894 @code{buffer-invisibility-spec}. If @code{buffer-invisibility-spec}
895 was @code{t}, it changes to a list, @code{(t)}, so that text whose
896 @code{invisible} property is @code{t} remains invisible.
897 @end defun
898
899 @defun remove-from-invisibility-spec element
900 This removes the element @var{element} from
901 @code{buffer-invisibility-spec}. This does nothing if @var{element}
902 is not in the list.
903 @end defun
904
905 A convention for use of @code{buffer-invisibility-spec} is that a
906 major mode should use the mode's own name as an element of
907 @code{buffer-invisibility-spec} and as the value of the
908 @code{invisible} property:
909
910 @example
911 ;; @r{If you want to display an ellipsis:}
912 (add-to-invisibility-spec '(my-symbol . t))
913 ;; @r{If you don't want ellipsis:}
914 (add-to-invisibility-spec 'my-symbol)
915
916 (overlay-put (make-overlay beginning end)
917 'invisible 'my-symbol)
918
919 ;; @r{When done with the invisibility:}
920 (remove-from-invisibility-spec '(my-symbol . t))
921 ;; @r{Or respectively:}
922 (remove-from-invisibility-spec 'my-symbol)
923 @end example
924
925 You can check for invisibility using the following function:
926
927 @defun invisible-p pos-or-prop
928 If @var{pos-or-prop} is a marker or number, this function returns a
929 non-@code{nil} value if the text at that position is invisible.
930
931 If @var{pos-or-prop} is any other kind of Lisp object, that is taken
932 to mean a possible value of the @code{invisible} text or overlay
933 property. In that case, this function returns a non-@code{nil} value
934 if that value would cause text to become invisible, based on the
935 current value of @code{buffer-invisibility-spec}.
936 @end defun
937
938 @vindex line-move-ignore-invisible
939 Ordinarily, functions that operate on text or move point do not care
940 whether the text is invisible, they process invisible characters and
941 visible characters alike. The user-level line motion commands,
942 such as @code{next-line}, @code{previous-line}, ignore invisible
943 newlines if @code{line-move-ignore-invisible} is non-@code{nil} (the
944 default), i.e., behave like these invisible newlines didn't exist in
945 the buffer, but only because they are explicitly programmed to do so.
946
947 If a command ends with point inside or at the boundary of
948 invisible text, the main editing loop relocates point to one of the
949 two ends of the invisible text. Emacs chooses the direction of
950 relocation so that it is the same as the overall movement direction of
951 the command; if in doubt, it prefers a position where an inserted char
952 would not inherit the @code{invisible} property. Additionally, if the
953 text is not replaced by an ellipsis and the command only moved within
954 the invisible text, then point is moved one extra character so as to
955 try and reflect the command's movement by a visible movement of the
956 cursor.
957
958 Thus, if the command moved point back to an invisible range (with the usual
959 stickiness), Emacs moves point back to the beginning of that range. If the
960 command moved point forward into an invisible range, Emacs moves point forward
961 to the first visible character that follows the invisible text and then forward
962 one more character.
963
964 These @dfn{adjustments} of point that ended up in the middle of
965 invisible text can be disabled by setting @code{disable-point-adjustment}
966 to a non-@code{nil} value. @xref{Adjusting Point}.
967
968 Incremental search can make invisible overlays visible temporarily
969 and/or permanently when a match includes invisible text. To enable
970 this, the overlay should have a non-@code{nil}
971 @code{isearch-open-invisible} property. The property value should be a
972 function to be called with the overlay as an argument. This function
973 should make the overlay visible permanently; it is used when the match
974 overlaps the overlay on exit from the search.
975
976 During the search, such overlays are made temporarily visible by
977 temporarily modifying their invisible and intangible properties. If you
978 want this to be done differently for a certain overlay, give it an
979 @code{isearch-open-invisible-temporary} property which is a function.
980 The function is called with two arguments: the first is the overlay, and
981 the second is @code{nil} to make the overlay visible, or @code{t} to
982 make it invisible again.
983
984 @node Selective Display
985 @section Selective Display
986 @c @cindex selective display Duplicates selective-display
987
988 @dfn{Selective display} refers to a pair of related features for
989 hiding certain lines on the screen.
990
991 @cindex explicit selective display
992 The first variant, explicit selective display, was designed for use in a Lisp
993 program: it controls which lines are hidden by altering the text. This kind of
994 hiding is now obsolete; instead you can get the same effect with the
995 @code{invisible} property (@pxref{Invisible Text}).
996
997 In the second variant, the choice of lines to hide is made
998 automatically based on indentation. This variant is designed to be a
999 user-level feature.
1000
1001 The way you control explicit selective display is by replacing a
1002 newline (control-j) with a carriage return (control-m). The text that
1003 was formerly a line following that newline is now hidden. Strictly
1004 speaking, it is temporarily no longer a line at all, since only
1005 newlines can separate lines; it is now part of the previous line.
1006
1007 Selective display does not directly affect editing commands. For
1008 example, @kbd{C-f} (@code{forward-char}) moves point unhesitatingly
1009 into hidden text. However, the replacement of newline characters with
1010 carriage return characters affects some editing commands. For
1011 example, @code{next-line} skips hidden lines, since it searches only
1012 for newlines. Modes that use selective display can also define
1013 commands that take account of the newlines, or that control which
1014 parts of the text are hidden.
1015
1016 When you write a selectively displayed buffer into a file, all the
1017 control-m's are output as newlines. This means that when you next read
1018 in the file, it looks OK, with nothing hidden. The selective display
1019 effect is seen only within Emacs.
1020
1021 @defvar selective-display
1022 This buffer-local variable enables selective display. This means that
1023 lines, or portions of lines, may be made hidden.
1024
1025 @itemize @bullet
1026 @item
1027 If the value of @code{selective-display} is @code{t}, then the character
1028 control-m marks the start of hidden text; the control-m, and the rest
1029 of the line following it, are not displayed. This is explicit selective
1030 display.
1031
1032 @item
1033 If the value of @code{selective-display} is a positive integer, then
1034 lines that start with more than that many columns of indentation are not
1035 displayed.
1036 @end itemize
1037
1038 When some portion of a buffer is hidden, the vertical movement
1039 commands operate as if that portion did not exist, allowing a single
1040 @code{next-line} command to skip any number of hidden lines.
1041 However, character movement commands (such as @code{forward-char}) do
1042 not skip the hidden portion, and it is possible (if tricky) to insert
1043 or delete text in an hidden portion.
1044
1045 In the examples below, we show the @emph{display appearance} of the
1046 buffer @code{foo}, which changes with the value of
1047 @code{selective-display}. The @emph{contents} of the buffer do not
1048 change.
1049
1050 @example
1051 @group
1052 (setq selective-display nil)
1053 @result{} nil
1054
1055 ---------- Buffer: foo ----------
1056 1 on this column
1057 2on this column
1058 3n this column
1059 3n this column
1060 2on this column
1061 1 on this column
1062 ---------- Buffer: foo ----------
1063 @end group
1064
1065 @group
1066 (setq selective-display 2)
1067 @result{} 2
1068
1069 ---------- Buffer: foo ----------
1070 1 on this column
1071 2on this column
1072 2on this column
1073 1 on this column
1074 ---------- Buffer: foo ----------
1075 @end group
1076 @end example
1077 @end defvar
1078
1079 @defopt selective-display-ellipses
1080 If this buffer-local variable is non-@code{nil}, then Emacs displays
1081 @samp{@dots{}} at the end of a line that is followed by hidden text.
1082 This example is a continuation of the previous one.
1083
1084 @example
1085 @group
1086 (setq selective-display-ellipses t)
1087 @result{} t
1088
1089 ---------- Buffer: foo ----------
1090 1 on this column
1091 2on this column ...
1092 2on this column
1093 1 on this column
1094 ---------- Buffer: foo ----------
1095 @end group
1096 @end example
1097
1098 You can use a display table to substitute other text for the ellipsis
1099 (@samp{@dots{}}). @xref{Display Tables}.
1100 @end defopt
1101
1102 @node Temporary Displays
1103 @section Temporary Displays
1104 @cindex temporary display
1105 @cindex temporary buffer display
1106
1107 Temporary displays are used by Lisp programs to put output into a
1108 buffer and then present it to the user for perusal rather than for
1109 editing. Many help commands use this feature.
1110
1111 @defmac with-output-to-temp-buffer buffer-name body@dots{}
1112 This function executes the forms in @var{body} while arranging to insert
1113 any output they print into the buffer named @var{buffer-name}, which is
1114 first created if necessary, and put into Help mode. (See the similar
1115 form @code{with-temp-buffer-window} below.) Finally, the buffer is
1116 displayed in some window, but that window is not selected.
1117
1118 If the forms in @var{body} do not change the major mode in the output
1119 buffer, so that it is still Help mode at the end of their execution,
1120 then @code{with-output-to-temp-buffer} makes this buffer read-only at
1121 the end, and also scans it for function and variable names to make them
1122 into clickable cross-references. @xref{Docstring hyperlinks, , Tips for
1123 Documentation Strings}, in particular the item on hyperlinks in
1124 documentation strings, for more details.
1125
1126 The string @var{buffer-name} specifies the temporary buffer, which need
1127 not already exist. The argument must be a string, not a buffer. The
1128 buffer is erased initially (with no questions asked), and it is marked
1129 as unmodified after @code{with-output-to-temp-buffer} exits.
1130
1131 @code{with-output-to-temp-buffer} binds @code{standard-output} to the
1132 temporary buffer, then it evaluates the forms in @var{body}. Output
1133 using the Lisp output functions within @var{body} goes by default to
1134 that buffer (but screen display and messages in the echo area, although
1135 they are ``output'' in the general sense of the word, are not affected).
1136 @xref{Output Functions}.
1137
1138 Several hooks are available for customizing the behavior
1139 of this construct; they are listed below.
1140
1141 The value of the last form in @var{body} is returned.
1142
1143 @example
1144 @group
1145 ---------- Buffer: foo ----------
1146 This is the contents of foo.
1147 ---------- Buffer: foo ----------
1148 @end group
1149
1150 @group
1151 (with-output-to-temp-buffer "foo"
1152 (print 20)
1153 (print standard-output))
1154 @result{} #<buffer foo>
1155
1156 ---------- Buffer: foo ----------
1157
1158 20
1159
1160 #<buffer foo>
1161
1162 ---------- Buffer: foo ----------
1163 @end group
1164 @end example
1165 @end defmac
1166
1167 @defopt temp-buffer-show-function
1168 If this variable is non-@code{nil}, @code{with-output-to-temp-buffer}
1169 calls it as a function to do the job of displaying a help buffer. The
1170 function gets one argument, which is the buffer it should display.
1171
1172 It is a good idea for this function to run @code{temp-buffer-show-hook}
1173 just as @code{with-output-to-temp-buffer} normally would, inside of
1174 @code{save-selected-window} and with the chosen window and buffer
1175 selected.
1176 @end defopt
1177
1178 @defvar temp-buffer-setup-hook
1179 This normal hook is run by @code{with-output-to-temp-buffer} before
1180 evaluating @var{body}. When the hook runs, the temporary buffer is
1181 current. This hook is normally set up with a function to put the
1182 buffer in Help mode.
1183 @end defvar
1184
1185 @defvar temp-buffer-show-hook
1186 This normal hook is run by @code{with-output-to-temp-buffer} after
1187 displaying the temporary buffer. When the hook runs, the temporary buffer
1188 is current, and the window it was displayed in is selected.
1189 @end defvar
1190
1191 @defmac with-temp-buffer-window buffer-or-name action quit-function body@dots{}
1192 This macro is similar to @code{with-output-to-temp-buffer}. Like that
1193 construct, it executes @var{body} while arranging to insert any output
1194 it prints into the buffer named @var{buffer-or-name} and displays that
1195 buffer in some window. Unlike @code{with-output-to-temp-buffer},
1196 however, it does not automatically switch that buffer to Help mode.
1197
1198 The argument @var{buffer-or-name} specifies the temporary buffer. It
1199 can be either a buffer, which must already exist, or a string, in which
1200 case a buffer of that name is created, if necessary. The buffer is
1201 marked as unmodified and read-only when @code{with-temp-buffer-window}
1202 exits.
1203
1204 This macro does not call @code{temp-buffer-show-function}. Rather, it
1205 passes the @var{action} argument to @code{display-buffer}
1206 (@pxref{Choosing Window}) in order to display the buffer.
1207
1208 The value of the last form in @var{body} is returned, unless the
1209 argument @var{quit-function} is specified. In that case, it is called
1210 with two arguments: the window showing the buffer and the result of
1211 @var{body}. The final return value is then whatever @var{quit-function}
1212 returns.
1213
1214 @vindex temp-buffer-window-setup-hook
1215 @vindex temp-buffer-window-show-hook
1216 This macro uses the normal hooks @code{temp-buffer-window-setup-hook}
1217 and @code{temp-buffer-window-show-hook} in place of the analogous hooks
1218 run by @code{with-output-to-temp-buffer}.
1219 @end defmac
1220
1221 The two constructs described next are mostly identical to
1222 @code{with-temp-buffer-window} but differ from it as specified:
1223
1224 @defmac with-current-buffer-window buffer-or-name action quit-function &rest body
1225 This macro is like @code{with-temp-buffer-window} but unlike that makes
1226 the buffer specified by @var{buffer-or-name} current for running
1227 @var{body}.
1228 @end defmac
1229
1230 @defmac with-displayed-buffer-window buffer-or-name action quit-function &rest body
1231 This macro is like @code{with-current-buffer-window} but unlike that
1232 displays the buffer specified by @var{buffer-or-name} @emph{before}
1233 running @var{body}.
1234 @end defmac
1235
1236 A window showing a temporary buffer can be fit to the size of that
1237 buffer using the following mode:
1238
1239 @defopt temp-buffer-resize-mode
1240 When this minor mode is enabled, windows showing a temporary buffer are
1241 automatically resized to fit their buffer's contents.
1242
1243 A window is resized if and only if it has been specially created for the
1244 buffer. In particular, windows that have shown another buffer before
1245 are not resized. By default, this mode uses @code{fit-window-to-buffer}
1246 (@pxref{Resizing Windows}) for resizing. You can specify a different
1247 function by customizing the options @code{temp-buffer-max-height} and
1248 @code{temp-buffer-max-width} below.
1249 @end defopt
1250
1251 @defopt temp-buffer-max-height
1252 This option specifies the maximum height (in lines) of a window
1253 displaying a temporary buffer when @code{temp-buffer-resize-mode} is
1254 enabled. It can also be a function to be called to choose the height
1255 for such a buffer. It gets one argument, the buffer, and should return
1256 a positive integer. At the time the function is called, the window to
1257 be resized is selected.
1258 @end defopt
1259
1260 @defopt temp-buffer-max-width
1261 This option specifies the maximum width of a window (in columns)
1262 displaying a temporary buffer when @code{temp-buffer-resize-mode} is
1263 enabled. It can also be a function to be called to choose the width for
1264 such a buffer. It gets one argument, the buffer, and should return a
1265 positive integer. At the time the function is called, the window to be
1266 resized is selected.
1267 @end defopt
1268
1269 The following function uses the current buffer for temporal display:
1270
1271 @defun momentary-string-display string position &optional char message
1272 This function momentarily displays @var{string} in the current buffer at
1273 @var{position}. It has no effect on the undo list or on the buffer's
1274 modification status.
1275
1276 The momentary display remains until the next input event. If the next
1277 input event is @var{char}, @code{momentary-string-display} ignores it
1278 and returns. Otherwise, that event remains buffered for subsequent use
1279 as input. Thus, typing @var{char} will simply remove the string from
1280 the display, while typing (say) @kbd{C-f} will remove the string from
1281 the display and later (presumably) move point forward. The argument
1282 @var{char} is a space by default.
1283
1284 The return value of @code{momentary-string-display} is not meaningful.
1285
1286 If the string @var{string} does not contain control characters, you can
1287 do the same job in a more general way by creating (and then subsequently
1288 deleting) an overlay with a @code{before-string} property.
1289 @xref{Overlay Properties}.
1290
1291 If @var{message} is non-@code{nil}, it is displayed in the echo area
1292 while @var{string} is displayed in the buffer. If it is @code{nil}, a
1293 default message says to type @var{char} to continue.
1294
1295 In this example, point is initially located at the beginning of the
1296 second line:
1297
1298 @example
1299 @group
1300 ---------- Buffer: foo ----------
1301 This is the contents of foo.
1302 @point{}Second line.
1303 ---------- Buffer: foo ----------
1304 @end group
1305
1306 @group
1307 (momentary-string-display
1308 "**** Important Message! ****"
1309 (point) ?\r
1310 "Type RET when done reading")
1311 @result{} t
1312 @end group
1313
1314 @group
1315 ---------- Buffer: foo ----------
1316 This is the contents of foo.
1317 **** Important Message! ****Second line.
1318 ---------- Buffer: foo ----------
1319
1320 ---------- Echo Area ----------
1321 Type RET when done reading
1322 ---------- Echo Area ----------
1323 @end group
1324 @end example
1325 @end defun
1326
1327 @node Overlays
1328 @section Overlays
1329 @cindex overlays
1330 @c FIXME: mention intervals in this section?
1331
1332 You can use @dfn{overlays} to alter the appearance of a buffer's text on
1333 the screen, for the sake of presentation features. An overlay is an
1334 object that belongs to a particular buffer, and has a specified
1335 beginning and end. It also has properties that you can examine and set;
1336 these affect the display of the text within the overlay.
1337
1338 @cindex scalability of overlays
1339 @cindex overlays, scalability
1340 The visual effect of an overlay is the same as of the corresponding
1341 text property (@pxref{Text Properties}). However, due to a different
1342 implementation, overlays generally don't scale well (many operations
1343 take a time that is proportional to the number of overlays in the
1344 buffer). If you need to affect the visual appearance of many portions
1345 in the buffer, we recommend using text properties.
1346
1347 An overlay uses markers to record its beginning and end; thus,
1348 editing the text of the buffer adjusts the beginning and end of each
1349 overlay so that it stays with the text. When you create the overlay,
1350 you can specify whether text inserted at the beginning should be
1351 inside the overlay or outside, and likewise for the end of the overlay.
1352
1353 @menu
1354 * Managing Overlays:: Creating and moving overlays.
1355 * Overlay Properties:: How to read and set properties.
1356 What properties do to the screen display.
1357 * Finding Overlays:: Searching for overlays.
1358 @end menu
1359
1360 @node Managing Overlays
1361 @subsection Managing Overlays
1362 @cindex managing overlays
1363 @cindex overlays, managing
1364
1365 This section describes the functions to create, delete and move
1366 overlays, and to examine their contents. Overlay changes are not
1367 recorded in the buffer's undo list, since the overlays are not
1368 part of the buffer's contents.
1369
1370 @defun overlayp object
1371 This function returns @code{t} if @var{object} is an overlay.
1372 @end defun
1373
1374 @defun make-overlay start end &optional buffer front-advance rear-advance
1375 This function creates and returns an overlay that belongs to
1376 @var{buffer} and ranges from @var{start} to @var{end}. Both @var{start}
1377 and @var{end} must specify buffer positions; they may be integers or
1378 markers. If @var{buffer} is omitted, the overlay is created in the
1379 current buffer.
1380
1381 @cindex empty overlay
1382 @cindex overlay, empty
1383 An overlay whose @var{start} and @var{end} specify the same buffer
1384 position is known as @dfn{empty}. A non-empty overlay can become
1385 empty if the text between its @var{start} and @var{end} is deleted.
1386 When that happens, the overlay is by default not deleted, but you can
1387 cause it to be deleted by giving it the @samp{evaporate} property
1388 (@pxref{Overlay Properties, evaporate property}).
1389
1390 The arguments @var{front-advance} and @var{rear-advance} specify the
1391 marker insertion type for the start of the overlay and for the end of
1392 the overlay, respectively. @xref{Marker Insertion Types}. If they
1393 are both @code{nil}, the default, then the overlay extends to include
1394 any text inserted at the beginning, but not text inserted at the end.
1395 If @var{front-advance} is non-@code{nil}, text inserted at the
1396 beginning of the overlay is excluded from the overlay. If
1397 @var{rear-advance} is non-@code{nil}, text inserted at the end of the
1398 overlay is included in the overlay.
1399 @end defun
1400
1401 @defun overlay-start overlay
1402 This function returns the position at which @var{overlay} starts,
1403 as an integer.
1404 @end defun
1405
1406 @defun overlay-end overlay
1407 This function returns the position at which @var{overlay} ends,
1408 as an integer.
1409 @end defun
1410
1411 @defun overlay-buffer overlay
1412 This function returns the buffer that @var{overlay} belongs to. It
1413 returns @code{nil} if @var{overlay} has been deleted.
1414 @end defun
1415
1416 @defun delete-overlay overlay
1417 This function deletes @var{overlay}. The overlay continues to exist as
1418 a Lisp object, and its property list is unchanged, but it ceases to be
1419 attached to the buffer it belonged to, and ceases to have any effect on
1420 display.
1421
1422 A deleted overlay is not permanently disconnected. You can give it a
1423 position in a buffer again by calling @code{move-overlay}.
1424 @end defun
1425
1426 @defun move-overlay overlay start end &optional buffer
1427 This function moves @var{overlay} to @var{buffer}, and places its bounds
1428 at @var{start} and @var{end}. Both arguments @var{start} and @var{end}
1429 must specify buffer positions; they may be integers or markers.
1430
1431 If @var{buffer} is omitted, @var{overlay} stays in the same buffer it
1432 was already associated with; if @var{overlay} was deleted, it goes into
1433 the current buffer.
1434
1435 The return value is @var{overlay}.
1436
1437 This is the only valid way to change the endpoints of an overlay. Do
1438 not try modifying the markers in the overlay by hand, as that fails to
1439 update other vital data structures and can cause some overlays to be
1440 lost.
1441 @end defun
1442
1443 @defun remove-overlays &optional start end name value
1444 This function removes all the overlays between @var{start} and
1445 @var{end} whose property @var{name} has the value @var{value}. It can
1446 move the endpoints of the overlays in the region, or split them.
1447
1448 If @var{name} is omitted or @code{nil}, it means to delete all overlays in
1449 the specified region. If @var{start} and/or @var{end} are omitted or
1450 @code{nil}, that means the beginning and end of the buffer respectively.
1451 Therefore, @code{(remove-overlays)} removes all the overlays in the
1452 current buffer.
1453 @end defun
1454
1455 @defun copy-overlay overlay
1456 This function returns a copy of @var{overlay}. The copy has the same
1457 endpoints and properties as @var{overlay}. However, the marker
1458 insertion type for the start of the overlay and for the end of the
1459 overlay are set to their default values (@pxref{Marker Insertion
1460 Types}).
1461 @end defun
1462
1463 Here are some examples:
1464
1465 @example
1466 ;; @r{Create an overlay.}
1467 (setq foo (make-overlay 1 10))
1468 @result{} #<overlay from 1 to 10 in display.texi>
1469 (overlay-start foo)
1470 @result{} 1
1471 (overlay-end foo)
1472 @result{} 10
1473 (overlay-buffer foo)
1474 @result{} #<buffer display.texi>
1475 ;; @r{Give it a property we can check later.}
1476 (overlay-put foo 'happy t)
1477 @result{} t
1478 ;; @r{Verify the property is present.}
1479 (overlay-get foo 'happy)
1480 @result{} t
1481 ;; @r{Move the overlay.}
1482 (move-overlay foo 5 20)
1483 @result{} #<overlay from 5 to 20 in display.texi>
1484 (overlay-start foo)
1485 @result{} 5
1486 (overlay-end foo)
1487 @result{} 20
1488 ;; @r{Delete the overlay.}
1489 (delete-overlay foo)
1490 @result{} nil
1491 ;; @r{Verify it is deleted.}
1492 foo
1493 @result{} #<overlay in no buffer>
1494 ;; @r{A deleted overlay has no position.}
1495 (overlay-start foo)
1496 @result{} nil
1497 (overlay-end foo)
1498 @result{} nil
1499 (overlay-buffer foo)
1500 @result{} nil
1501 ;; @r{Undelete the overlay.}
1502 (move-overlay foo 1 20)
1503 @result{} #<overlay from 1 to 20 in display.texi>
1504 ;; @r{Verify the results.}
1505 (overlay-start foo)
1506 @result{} 1
1507 (overlay-end foo)
1508 @result{} 20
1509 (overlay-buffer foo)
1510 @result{} #<buffer display.texi>
1511 ;; @r{Moving and deleting the overlay does not change its properties.}
1512 (overlay-get foo 'happy)
1513 @result{} t
1514 @end example
1515
1516 Emacs stores the overlays of each buffer in two lists, divided
1517 around an arbitrary center position. One list extends backwards
1518 through the buffer from that center position, and the other extends
1519 forwards from that center position. The center position can be anywhere
1520 in the buffer.
1521
1522 @defun overlay-recenter pos
1523 This function recenters the overlays of the current buffer around
1524 position @var{pos}. That makes overlay lookup faster for positions
1525 near @var{pos}, but slower for positions far away from @var{pos}.
1526 @end defun
1527
1528 A loop that scans the buffer forwards, creating overlays, can run
1529 faster if you do @code{(overlay-recenter (point-max))} first.
1530
1531 @node Overlay Properties
1532 @subsection Overlay Properties
1533 @cindex overlay properties
1534
1535 Overlay properties are like text properties in that the properties that
1536 alter how a character is displayed can come from either source. But in
1537 most respects they are different. @xref{Text Properties}, for comparison.
1538
1539 Text properties are considered a part of the text; overlays and
1540 their properties are specifically considered not to be part of the
1541 text. Thus, copying text between various buffers and strings
1542 preserves text properties, but does not try to preserve overlays.
1543 Changing a buffer's text properties marks the buffer as modified,
1544 while moving an overlay or changing its properties does not. Unlike
1545 text property changes, overlay property changes are not recorded in
1546 the buffer's undo list.
1547
1548 Since more than one overlay can specify a property value for the
1549 same character, Emacs lets you specify a priority value of each
1550 overlay. In case two overlays have the same priority value, and one
1551 is nested in the other, then the inner one will have priority over the
1552 outer one. If neither is nested in the other then you should not make
1553 assumptions about which overlay will prevail.
1554
1555 These functions read and set the properties of an overlay:
1556
1557 @defun overlay-get overlay prop
1558 This function returns the value of property @var{prop} recorded in
1559 @var{overlay}, if any. If @var{overlay} does not record any value for
1560 that property, but it does have a @code{category} property which is a
1561 symbol, that symbol's @var{prop} property is used. Otherwise, the value
1562 is @code{nil}.
1563 @end defun
1564
1565 @defun overlay-put overlay prop value
1566 This function sets the value of property @var{prop} recorded in
1567 @var{overlay} to @var{value}. It returns @var{value}.
1568 @end defun
1569
1570 @defun overlay-properties overlay
1571 This returns a copy of the property list of @var{overlay}.
1572 @end defun
1573
1574 See also the function @code{get-char-property} which checks both
1575 overlay properties and text properties for a given character.
1576 @xref{Examining Properties}.
1577
1578 Many overlay properties have special meanings; here is a table
1579 of them:
1580
1581 @table @code
1582 @item priority
1583 @kindex priority @r{(overlay property)}
1584 This property's value determines the priority of the overlay.
1585 If you want to specify a priority value, use either @code{nil}
1586 (or zero), or a positive integer. Any other value has undefined behavior.
1587
1588 The priority matters when two or more overlays cover the same
1589 character and both specify the same property; the one whose
1590 @code{priority} value is larger overrides the other. For the
1591 @code{face} property, the higher priority overlay's value does not
1592 completely override the other value; instead, its face attributes
1593 override the face attributes of the lower priority @code{face}
1594 property.
1595
1596 Currently, all overlays take priority over text properties.
1597
1598 Note that Emacs sometimes uses non-numeric priority values for some of
1599 its internal overlays, so do not try to do arithmetic on the
1600 priority of an overlay (unless it is one that you created). If you
1601 need to put overlays in priority order, use the @var{sorted} argument
1602 of @code{overlays-at}. @xref{Finding Overlays}.
1603
1604 @item window
1605 @kindex window @r{(overlay property)}
1606 If the @code{window} property is non-@code{nil}, then the overlay
1607 applies only on that window.
1608
1609 @item category
1610 @kindex category @r{(overlay property)}
1611 If an overlay has a @code{category} property, we call it the
1612 @dfn{category} of the overlay. It should be a symbol. The properties
1613 of the symbol serve as defaults for the properties of the overlay.
1614
1615 @item face
1616 @kindex face @r{(overlay property)}
1617 This property controls the appearance of the text (@pxref{Faces}).
1618 The value of the property can be the following:
1619
1620 @itemize @bullet
1621 @item
1622 A face name (a symbol or string).
1623
1624 @item
1625 An anonymous face: a property list of the form @code{(@var{keyword}
1626 @var{value} @dots{})}, where each @var{keyword} is a face attribute
1627 name and @var{value} is a value for that attribute.
1628
1629 @item
1630 A list of faces. Each list element should be either a face name or an
1631 anonymous face. This specifies a face which is an aggregate of the
1632 attributes of each of the listed faces. Faces occurring earlier in
1633 the list have higher priority.
1634
1635 @item
1636 A cons cell of the form @code{(foreground-color . @var{color-name})}
1637 or @code{(background-color . @var{color-name})}. This specifies the
1638 foreground or background color, similar to @code{(:foreground
1639 @var{color-name})} or @code{(:background @var{color-name})}. This
1640 form is supported for backward compatibility only, and should be
1641 avoided.
1642 @end itemize
1643
1644 @item mouse-face
1645 @kindex mouse-face @r{(overlay property)}
1646 This property is used instead of @code{face} when the mouse is within
1647 the range of the overlay. However, Emacs ignores all face attributes
1648 from this property that alter the text size (e.g., @code{:height},
1649 @code{:weight}, and @code{:slant}). Those attributes are always the
1650 same as in the unhighlighted text.
1651
1652 @item display
1653 @kindex display @r{(overlay property)}
1654 This property activates various features that change the
1655 way text is displayed. For example, it can make text appear taller
1656 or shorter, higher or lower, wider or narrower, or replaced with an image.
1657 @xref{Display Property}.
1658
1659 @item help-echo
1660 @kindex help-echo @r{(overlay property)}
1661 If an overlay has a @code{help-echo} property, then when you move the
1662 mouse onto the text in the overlay, Emacs displays a help string in the
1663 echo area, or in the tooltip window. For details see @ref{Text
1664 help-echo}.
1665
1666 @item field
1667 @kindex field @r{(overlay property)}
1668 @c Copied from Special Properties.
1669 Consecutive characters with the same @code{field} property constitute a
1670 @emph{field}. Some motion functions including @code{forward-word} and
1671 @code{beginning-of-line} stop moving at a field boundary.
1672 @xref{Fields}.
1673
1674 @item modification-hooks
1675 @kindex modification-hooks @r{(overlay property)}
1676 This property's value is a list of functions to be called if any
1677 character within the overlay is changed or if text is inserted strictly
1678 within the overlay.
1679
1680 The hook functions are called both before and after each change.
1681 If the functions save the information they receive, and compare notes
1682 between calls, they can determine exactly what change has been made
1683 in the buffer text.
1684
1685 When called before a change, each function receives four arguments: the
1686 overlay, @code{nil}, and the beginning and end of the text range to be
1687 modified.
1688
1689 When called after a change, each function receives five arguments: the
1690 overlay, @code{t}, the beginning and end of the text range just
1691 modified, and the length of the pre-change text replaced by that range.
1692 (For an insertion, the pre-change length is zero; for a deletion, that
1693 length is the number of characters deleted, and the post-change
1694 beginning and end are equal.)
1695
1696 If these functions modify the buffer, they should bind
1697 @code{inhibit-modification-hooks} to @code{t} around doing so, to
1698 avoid confusing the internal mechanism that calls these hooks.
1699
1700 Text properties also support the @code{modification-hooks} property,
1701 but the details are somewhat different (@pxref{Special Properties}).
1702
1703 @item insert-in-front-hooks
1704 @kindex insert-in-front-hooks @r{(overlay property)}
1705 This property's value is a list of functions to be called before and
1706 after inserting text right at the beginning of the overlay. The calling
1707 conventions are the same as for the @code{modification-hooks} functions.
1708
1709 @item insert-behind-hooks
1710 @kindex insert-behind-hooks @r{(overlay property)}
1711 This property's value is a list of functions to be called before and
1712 after inserting text right at the end of the overlay. The calling
1713 conventions are the same as for the @code{modification-hooks} functions.
1714
1715 @item invisible
1716 @kindex invisible @r{(overlay property)}
1717 The @code{invisible} property can make the text in the overlay
1718 invisible, which means that it does not appear on the screen.
1719 @xref{Invisible Text}, for details.
1720
1721 @item intangible
1722 @kindex intangible @r{(overlay property)}
1723 The @code{intangible} property on an overlay works just like the
1724 @code{intangible} text property. @xref{Special Properties}, for details.
1725
1726 @item isearch-open-invisible
1727 This property tells incremental search how to make an invisible overlay
1728 visible, permanently, if the final match overlaps it. @xref{Invisible
1729 Text}.
1730
1731 @item isearch-open-invisible-temporary
1732 This property tells incremental search how to make an invisible overlay
1733 visible, temporarily, during the search. @xref{Invisible Text}.
1734
1735 @item before-string
1736 @kindex before-string @r{(overlay property)}
1737 This property's value is a string to add to the display at the beginning
1738 of the overlay. The string does not appear in the buffer in any
1739 sense---only on the screen.
1740
1741 @item after-string
1742 @kindex after-string @r{(overlay property)}
1743 This property's value is a string to add to the display at the end of
1744 the overlay. The string does not appear in the buffer in any
1745 sense---only on the screen.
1746
1747 @item line-prefix
1748 This property specifies a display spec to prepend to each
1749 non-continuation line at display-time. @xref{Truncation}.
1750
1751 @item wrap-prefix
1752 This property specifies a display spec to prepend to each continuation
1753 line at display-time. @xref{Truncation}.
1754
1755 @item evaporate
1756 @kindex evaporate @r{(overlay property)}
1757 If this property is non-@code{nil}, the overlay is deleted automatically
1758 if it becomes empty (i.e., if its length becomes zero). If you give
1759 an empty overlay (@pxref{Managing Overlays, empty overlay}) a
1760 non-@code{nil} @code{evaporate} property, that deletes it immediately.
1761 Note that, unless an overlay has this property, it will not be deleted
1762 when the text between its starting and ending positions is deleted
1763 from the buffer.
1764
1765 @item keymap
1766 @cindex keymap of character (and overlays)
1767 @kindex keymap @r{(overlay property)}
1768 If this property is non-@code{nil}, it specifies a keymap for a portion of the
1769 text. This keymap is used when the character after point is within the
1770 overlay, and takes precedence over most other keymaps. @xref{Active Keymaps}.
1771
1772 @item local-map
1773 @kindex local-map @r{(overlay property)}
1774 The @code{local-map} property is similar to @code{keymap} but replaces the
1775 buffer's local map rather than augmenting existing keymaps. This also means it
1776 has lower precedence than minor mode keymaps.
1777 @end table
1778
1779 The @code{keymap} and @code{local-map} properties do not affect a
1780 string displayed by the @code{before-string}, @code{after-string}, or
1781 @code{display} properties. This is only relevant for mouse clicks and
1782 other mouse events that fall on the string, since point is never on
1783 the string. To bind special mouse events for the string, assign it a
1784 @code{keymap} or @code{local-map} text property. @xref{Special
1785 Properties}.
1786
1787 @node Finding Overlays
1788 @subsection Searching for Overlays
1789 @cindex searching for overlays
1790 @cindex overlays, searching for
1791
1792 @defun overlays-at pos &optional sorted
1793 This function returns a list of all the overlays that cover the character at
1794 position @var{pos} in the current buffer. If @var{sorted} is non-@code{nil},
1795 the list is in decreasing order of priority, otherwise it is in no particular
1796 order. An overlay contains position @var{pos} if it begins at or before
1797 @var{pos}, and ends after @var{pos}.
1798
1799 To illustrate usage, here is a Lisp function that returns a list of the
1800 overlays that specify property @var{prop} for the character at point:
1801
1802 @smallexample
1803 (defun find-overlays-specifying (prop)
1804 (let ((overlays (overlays-at (point)))
1805 found)
1806 (while overlays
1807 (let ((overlay (car overlays)))
1808 (if (overlay-get overlay prop)
1809 (setq found (cons overlay found))))
1810 (setq overlays (cdr overlays)))
1811 found))
1812 @end smallexample
1813 @end defun
1814
1815 @defun overlays-in beg end
1816 This function returns a list of the overlays that overlap the region
1817 @var{beg} through @var{end}. An overlay overlaps with a region if it
1818 contains one or more characters in the region; empty overlays
1819 (@pxref{Managing Overlays, empty overlay}) overlap if they are at
1820 @var{beg}, strictly between @var{beg} and @var{end}, or at @var{end}
1821 when @var{end} denotes the position at the end of the buffer.
1822 @end defun
1823
1824 @defun next-overlay-change pos
1825 This function returns the buffer position of the next beginning or end
1826 of an overlay, after @var{pos}. If there is none, it returns
1827 @code{(point-max)}.
1828 @end defun
1829
1830 @defun previous-overlay-change pos
1831 This function returns the buffer position of the previous beginning or
1832 end of an overlay, before @var{pos}. If there is none, it returns
1833 @code{(point-min)}.
1834 @end defun
1835
1836 As an example, here's a simplified (and inefficient) version of the
1837 primitive function @code{next-single-char-property-change}
1838 (@pxref{Property Search}). It searches forward from position
1839 @var{pos} for the next position where the value of a given property
1840 @code{prop}, as obtained from either overlays or text properties,
1841 changes.
1842
1843 @smallexample
1844 (defun next-single-char-property-change (position prop)
1845 (save-excursion
1846 (goto-char position)
1847 (let ((propval (get-char-property (point) prop)))
1848 (while (and (not (eobp))
1849 (eq (get-char-property (point) prop) propval))
1850 (goto-char (min (next-overlay-change (point))
1851 (next-single-property-change (point) prop)))))
1852 (point)))
1853 @end smallexample
1854
1855 @node Size of Displayed Text
1856 @section Size of Displayed Text
1857 @cindex size of text on display
1858 @cindex character width on display
1859
1860 Since not all characters have the same width, these functions let you
1861 check the width of a character. @xref{Primitive Indent}, and
1862 @ref{Screen Lines}, for related functions.
1863
1864 @defun char-width char
1865 This function returns the width in columns of the character
1866 @var{char}, if it were displayed in the current buffer (i.e., taking
1867 into account the buffer's display table, if any; @pxref{Display
1868 Tables}). The width of a tab character is usually @code{tab-width}
1869 (@pxref{Usual Display}).
1870 @end defun
1871
1872 @defun string-width string
1873 This function returns the width in columns of the string @var{string},
1874 if it were displayed in the current buffer and the selected window.
1875 @end defun
1876
1877 @defun truncate-string-to-width string width &optional start-column padding ellipsis
1878 This function returns the part of @var{string} that fits within
1879 @var{width} columns, as a new string.
1880
1881 If @var{string} does not reach @var{width}, then the result ends where
1882 @var{string} ends. If one multi-column character in @var{string}
1883 extends across the column @var{width}, that character is not included in
1884 the result. Thus, the result can fall short of @var{width} but cannot
1885 go beyond it.
1886
1887 The optional argument @var{start-column} specifies the starting column.
1888 If this is non-@code{nil}, then the first @var{start-column} columns of
1889 the string are omitted from the value. If one multi-column character in
1890 @var{string} extends across the column @var{start-column}, that
1891 character is not included.
1892
1893 The optional argument @var{padding}, if non-@code{nil}, is a padding
1894 character added at the beginning and end of the result string, to extend
1895 it to exactly @var{width} columns. The padding character is used at the
1896 end of the result if it falls short of @var{width}. It is also used at
1897 the beginning of the result if one multi-column character in
1898 @var{string} extends across the column @var{start-column}.
1899
1900 @vindex truncate-string-ellipsis
1901 If @var{ellipsis} is non-@code{nil}, it should be a string which will
1902 replace the end of @var{string} (including any padding) if it extends
1903 beyond @var{width}, unless the display width of @var{string} is equal
1904 to or less than the display width of @var{ellipsis}. If
1905 @var{ellipsis} is non-@code{nil} and not a string, it stands for
1906 the value of the variable @code{truncate-string-ellipsis}.
1907
1908 @example
1909 (truncate-string-to-width "\tab\t" 12 4)
1910 @result{} "ab"
1911 (truncate-string-to-width "\tab\t" 12 4 ?\s)
1912 @result{} " ab "
1913 @end example
1914 @end defun
1915
1916 The following function returns the size in pixels of text as if it were
1917 displayed in a given window. This function is used by
1918 @code{fit-window-to-buffer} and @code{fit-frame-to-buffer}
1919 (@pxref{Resizing Windows}) to make a window exactly as large as the text
1920 it contains.
1921
1922 @defun window-text-pixel-size &optional window from to x-limit y-limit mode-and-header-line
1923 This function returns the size of the text of @var{window}'s buffer in
1924 pixels. @var{window} must be a live window and defaults to the selected
1925 one. The return value is a cons of the maximum pixel-width of any text
1926 line and the maximum pixel-height of all text lines.
1927
1928 The optional argument @var{from}, if non-@code{nil}, specifies the first
1929 text position to consider and defaults to the minimum accessible
1930 position of the buffer. If @var{from} is @code{t}, it uses the minimum
1931 accessible position that is not a newline character. The optional
1932 argument @var{to}, if non-@code{nil}, specifies the last text position
1933 to consider and defaults to the maximum accessible position of the
1934 buffer. If @var{to} is @code{t}, it uses the maximum accessible
1935 position that is not a newline character.
1936
1937 The optional argument @var{x-limit}, if non-@code{nil}, specifies the
1938 maximum pixel-width that can be returned. @var{x-limit} @code{nil} or
1939 omitted, means to use the pixel-width of @var{window}'s body
1940 (@pxref{Window Sizes}); this is useful when the caller does not intend
1941 to change the width of @var{window}. Otherwise, the caller should
1942 specify here the maximum width @var{window}'s body may assume. Text
1943 whose x-coordinate is beyond @var{x-limit} is ignored. Since
1944 calculating the width of long lines can take some time, it's always a
1945 good idea to make this argument as small as needed; in particular, if
1946 the buffer might contain long lines that will be truncated anyway.
1947
1948 The optional argument @var{y-limit}, if non-@code{nil}, specifies the
1949 maximum pixel-height that can be returned. Text lines whose
1950 y-coordinate is beyond @var{y-limit} are ignored. Since calculating the
1951 pixel-height of a large buffer can take some time, it makes sense to
1952 specify this argument; in particular, if the caller does not know the
1953 size of the buffer.
1954
1955 The optional argument @var{mode-and-header-line} @code{nil} or omitted
1956 means to not include the height of the mode- or header-line of
1957 @var{window} in the return value. If it is either the symbol
1958 @code{mode-line} or @code{header-line}, include only the height of that
1959 line, if present, in the return value. If it is @code{t}, include the
1960 height of both, if present, in the return value.
1961 @end defun
1962
1963
1964 @node Line Height
1965 @section Line Height
1966 @cindex line height
1967 @cindex height of a line
1968
1969 The total height of each display line consists of the height of the
1970 contents of the line, plus optional additional vertical line spacing
1971 above or below the display line.
1972
1973 The height of the line contents is the maximum height of any character
1974 or image on that display line, including the final newline if there is
1975 one. (A display line that is continued doesn't include a final
1976 newline.) That is the default line height, if you do nothing to specify
1977 a greater height. (In the most common case, this equals the height of
1978 the corresponding frame's default font, see @ref{Frame Font}.)
1979
1980 There are several ways to explicitly specify a larger line height,
1981 either by specifying an absolute height for the display line, or by
1982 specifying vertical space. However, no matter what you specify, the
1983 actual line height can never be less than the default.
1984
1985 @kindex line-height @r{(text property)}
1986 A newline can have a @code{line-height} text or overlay property
1987 that controls the total height of the display line ending in that
1988 newline.
1989
1990 If the property value is @code{t}, the newline character has no
1991 effect on the displayed height of the line---the visible contents
1992 alone determine the height. This is useful for tiling small images
1993 (or image slices) without adding blank areas between the images.
1994
1995 If the property value is a list of the form @code{(@var{height}
1996 @var{total})}, that adds extra space @emph{below} the display line.
1997 First Emacs uses @var{height} as a height spec to control extra space
1998 @emph{above} the line; then it adds enough space @emph{below} the line
1999 to bring the total line height up to @var{total}. In this case, the
2000 other ways to specify the line spacing are ignored.
2001
2002 @cindex height spec
2003 Any other kind of property value is a height spec, which translates
2004 into a number---the specified line height. There are several ways to
2005 write a height spec; here's how each of them translates into a number:
2006
2007 @table @code
2008 @item @var{integer}
2009 If the height spec is a positive integer, the height value is that integer.
2010 @item @var{float}
2011 If the height spec is a float, @var{float}, the numeric height value
2012 is @var{float} times the frame's default line height.
2013 @item (@var{face} . @var{ratio})
2014 If the height spec is a cons of the format shown, the numeric height
2015 is @var{ratio} times the height of face @var{face}. @var{ratio} can
2016 be any type of number, or @code{nil} which means a ratio of 1.
2017 If @var{face} is @code{t}, it refers to the current face.
2018 @item (nil . @var{ratio})
2019 If the height spec is a cons of the format shown, the numeric height
2020 is @var{ratio} times the height of the contents of the line.
2021 @end table
2022
2023 Thus, any valid height spec determines the height in pixels, one way
2024 or another. If the line contents' height is less than that, Emacs
2025 adds extra vertical space above the line to achieve the specified
2026 total height.
2027
2028 If you don't specify the @code{line-height} property, the line's
2029 height consists of the contents' height plus the line spacing.
2030 There are several ways to specify the line spacing for different
2031 parts of Emacs text.
2032
2033 On graphical terminals, you can specify the line spacing for all
2034 lines in a frame, using the @code{line-spacing} frame parameter
2035 (@pxref{Layout Parameters}). However, if the default value of
2036 @code{line-spacing} is non-@code{nil}, it overrides the
2037 frame's @code{line-spacing} parameter. An integer specifies the
2038 number of pixels put below lines. A floating-point number specifies
2039 the spacing relative to the frame's default line height.
2040
2041 @vindex line-spacing
2042 You can specify the line spacing for all lines in a buffer via the
2043 buffer-local @code{line-spacing} variable. An integer specifies
2044 the number of pixels put below lines. A floating-point number
2045 specifies the spacing relative to the default frame line height. This
2046 overrides line spacings specified for the frame.
2047
2048 @kindex line-spacing @r{(text property)}
2049 Finally, a newline can have a @code{line-spacing} text or overlay
2050 property that overrides the default frame line spacing and the buffer
2051 local @code{line-spacing} variable, for the display line ending in
2052 that newline.
2053
2054 One way or another, these mechanisms specify a Lisp value for the
2055 spacing of each line. The value is a height spec, and it translates
2056 into a Lisp value as described above. However, in this case the
2057 numeric height value specifies the line spacing, rather than the line
2058 height.
2059
2060 On text terminals, the line spacing cannot be altered.
2061
2062 @node Faces
2063 @section Faces
2064 @cindex faces
2065
2066 A @dfn{face} is a collection of graphical attributes for displaying
2067 text: font, foreground color, background color, optional underlining,
2068 etc. Faces control how Emacs displays text in buffers, as well as
2069 other parts of the frame such as the mode line.
2070
2071 @cindex anonymous face
2072 One way to represent a face is as a property list of attributes,
2073 like @code{(:foreground "red" :weight bold)}. Such a list is called
2074 an @dfn{anonymous face}. For example, you can assign an anonymous
2075 face as the value of the @code{face} text property, and Emacs will
2076 display the underlying text with the specified attributes.
2077 @xref{Special Properties}.
2078
2079 @cindex face name
2080 More commonly, a face is referred to via a @dfn{face name}: a Lisp
2081 symbol associated with a set of face attributes@footnote{For backward
2082 compatibility, you can also use a string to specify a face name; that
2083 is equivalent to a Lisp symbol with the same name.}. Named faces are
2084 defined using the @code{defface} macro (@pxref{Defining Faces}).
2085 Emacs comes with several standard named faces (@pxref{Basic Faces}).
2086
2087 Many parts of Emacs required named faces, and do not accept
2088 anonymous faces. These include the functions documented in
2089 @ref{Attribute Functions}, and the variable @code{font-lock-keywords}
2090 (@pxref{Search-based Fontification}). Unless otherwise stated, we
2091 will use the term @dfn{face} to refer only to named faces.
2092
2093 @defun facep object
2094 This function returns a non-@code{nil} value if @var{object} is a
2095 named face: a Lisp symbol or string which serves as a face name.
2096 Otherwise, it returns @code{nil}.
2097 @end defun
2098
2099 @menu
2100 * Face Attributes:: What is in a face?
2101 * Defining Faces:: How to define a face.
2102 * Attribute Functions:: Functions to examine and set face attributes.
2103 * Displaying Faces:: How Emacs combines the faces specified for a character.
2104 * Face Remapping:: Remapping faces to alternative definitions.
2105 * Face Functions:: How to define and examine faces.
2106 * Auto Faces:: Hook for automatic face assignment.
2107 * Basic Faces:: Faces that are defined by default.
2108 * Font Selection:: Finding the best available font for a face.
2109 * Font Lookup:: Looking up the names of available fonts
2110 and information about them.
2111 * Fontsets:: A fontset is a collection of fonts
2112 that handle a range of character sets.
2113 * Low-Level Font:: Lisp representation for character display fonts.
2114 @end menu
2115
2116 @node Face Attributes
2117 @subsection Face Attributes
2118 @cindex face attributes
2119
2120 @dfn{Face attributes} determine the visual appearance of a face.
2121 The following table lists all the face attributes, their possible
2122 values, and their effects.
2123
2124 Apart from the values given below, each face attribute can have the
2125 value @code{unspecified}. This special value means that the face
2126 doesn't specify that attribute directly. An @code{unspecified}
2127 attribute tells Emacs to refer instead to a parent face (see the
2128 description @code{:inherit} attribute below); or, failing that, to an
2129 underlying face (@pxref{Displaying Faces}). The @code{default} face
2130 must specify all attributes.
2131
2132 Some of these attributes are meaningful only on certain kinds of
2133 displays. If your display cannot handle a certain attribute, the
2134 attribute is ignored.
2135
2136 @table @code
2137 @item :family
2138 Font family or fontset (a string). @xref{Fonts,,, emacs, The GNU
2139 Emacs Manual}, for more information about font families. The function
2140 @code{font-family-list} (see below) returns a list of available family
2141 names. @xref{Fontsets}, for information about fontsets.
2142
2143 @item :foundry
2144 The name of the @dfn{font foundry} for the font family specified by
2145 the @code{:family} attribute (a string). @xref{Fonts,,, emacs, The
2146 GNU Emacs Manual}.
2147
2148 @item :width
2149 Relative character width. This should be one of the symbols
2150 @code{ultra-condensed}, @code{extra-condensed}, @code{condensed},
2151 @code{semi-condensed}, @code{normal}, @code{semi-expanded},
2152 @code{expanded}, @code{extra-expanded}, or @code{ultra-expanded}.
2153
2154 @item :height
2155 The height of the font. In the simplest case, this is an integer in
2156 units of 1/10 point.
2157
2158 The value can also be floating point or a function, which
2159 specifies the height relative to an @dfn{underlying face}
2160 (@pxref{Displaying Faces}). A floating-point value
2161 specifies the amount by which to scale the height of the
2162 underlying face. A function value is called
2163 with one argument, the height of the underlying face, and returns the
2164 height of the new face. If the function is passed an integer
2165 argument, it must return an integer.
2166
2167 The height of the default face must be specified using an integer;
2168 floating point and function values are not allowed.
2169
2170 @item :weight
2171 Font weight---one of the symbols (from densest to faintest)
2172 @code{ultra-bold}, @code{extra-bold}, @code{bold}, @code{semi-bold},
2173 @code{normal}, @code{semi-light}, @code{light}, @code{extra-light}, or
2174 @code{ultra-light}. On text terminals which support
2175 variable-brightness text, any weight greater than normal is displayed
2176 as extra bright, and any weight less than normal is displayed as
2177 half-bright.
2178
2179 @cindex italic text
2180 @item :slant
2181 Font slant---one of the symbols @code{italic}, @code{oblique},
2182 @code{normal}, @code{reverse-italic}, or @code{reverse-oblique}. On
2183 text terminals that support variable-brightness text, slanted text is
2184 displayed as half-bright.
2185
2186 @item :foreground
2187 Foreground color, a string. The value can be a system-defined color
2188 name, or a hexadecimal color specification. @xref{Color Names}. On
2189 black-and-white displays, certain shades of gray are implemented by
2190 stipple patterns.
2191
2192 @item :distant-foreground
2193 Alternative foreground color, a string. This is like @code{:foreground}
2194 but the color is only used as a foreground when the background color is
2195 near to the foreground that would have been used. This is useful for
2196 example when marking text (i.e., the region face). If the text has a foreground
2197 that is visible with the region face, that foreground is used.
2198 If the foreground is near the region face background,
2199 @code{:distant-foreground} is used instead so the text is readable.
2200
2201 @item :background
2202 Background color, a string. The value can be a system-defined color
2203 name, or a hexadecimal color specification. @xref{Color Names}.
2204
2205 @cindex underlined text
2206 @item :underline
2207 Whether or not characters should be underlined, and in what
2208 way. The possible values of the @code{:underline} attribute are:
2209
2210 @table @asis
2211 @item @code{nil}
2212 Don't underline.
2213
2214 @item @code{t}
2215 Underline with the foreground color of the face.
2216
2217 @item @var{color}
2218 Underline in color @var{color}, a string specifying a color.
2219
2220 @item @code{(:color @var{color} :style @var{style})}
2221 @var{color} is either a string, or the symbol @code{foreground-color},
2222 meaning the foreground color of the face. Omitting the attribute
2223 @code{:color} means to use the foreground color of the face.
2224 @var{style} should be a symbol @code{line} or @code{wave}, meaning to
2225 use a straight or wavy line. Omitting the attribute @code{:style}
2226 means to use a straight line.
2227 @end table
2228
2229 @cindex overlined text
2230 @item :overline
2231 Whether or not characters should be overlined, and in what color.
2232 If the value is @code{t}, overlining uses the foreground color of the
2233 face. If the value is a string, overlining uses that color. The
2234 value @code{nil} means do not overline.
2235
2236 @cindex strike-through text
2237 @item :strike-through
2238 Whether or not characters should be strike-through, and in what
2239 color. The value is used like that of @code{:overline}.
2240
2241 @cindex 2D box
2242 @cindex 3D box
2243 @item :box
2244 Whether or not a box should be drawn around characters, its color, the
2245 width of the box lines, and 3D appearance. Here are the possible
2246 values of the @code{:box} attribute, and what they mean:
2247
2248 @table @asis
2249 @item @code{nil}
2250 Don't draw a box.
2251
2252 @item @code{t}
2253 Draw a box with lines of width 1, in the foreground color.
2254
2255 @item @var{color}
2256 Draw a box with lines of width 1, in color @var{color}.
2257
2258 @item @code{(:line-width @var{width} :color @var{color} :style @var{style})}
2259 This way you can explicitly specify all aspects of the box. The value
2260 @var{width} specifies the width of the lines to draw; it defaults to
2261 1. A negative width @var{-n} means to draw a line of width @var{n}
2262 that occupies the space of the underlying text, thus avoiding any
2263 increase in the character height or width.
2264
2265 The value @var{color} specifies the color to draw with. The default is
2266 the foreground color of the face for simple boxes, and the background
2267 color of the face for 3D boxes.
2268
2269 The value @var{style} specifies whether to draw a 3D box. If it is
2270 @code{released-button}, the box looks like a 3D button that is not being
2271 pressed. If it is @code{pressed-button}, the box looks like a 3D button
2272 that is being pressed. If it is @code{nil} or omitted, a plain 2D box
2273 is used.
2274 @end table
2275
2276 @item :inverse-video
2277 Whether or not characters should be displayed in inverse video. The
2278 value should be @code{t} (yes) or @code{nil} (no).
2279
2280 @item :stipple
2281 The background stipple, a bitmap.
2282
2283 The value can be a string; that should be the name of a file containing
2284 external-format X bitmap data. The file is found in the directories
2285 listed in the variable @code{x-bitmap-file-path}.
2286
2287 Alternatively, the value can specify the bitmap directly, with a list
2288 of the form @code{(@var{width} @var{height} @var{data})}. Here,
2289 @var{width} and @var{height} specify the size in pixels, and
2290 @var{data} is a string containing the raw bits of the bitmap, row by
2291 row. Each row occupies @math{(@var{width} + 7) / 8} consecutive bytes
2292 in the string (which should be a unibyte string for best results).
2293 This means that each row always occupies at least one whole byte.
2294
2295 If the value is @code{nil}, that means use no stipple pattern.
2296
2297 Normally you do not need to set the stipple attribute, because it is
2298 used automatically to handle certain shades of gray.
2299
2300 @item :font
2301 The font used to display the face. Its value should be a font object.
2302 @xref{Low-Level Font}, for information about font objects, font specs,
2303 and font entities.
2304
2305 When specifying this attribute using @code{set-face-attribute}
2306 (@pxref{Attribute Functions}), you may also supply a font spec, a font
2307 entity, or a string. Emacs converts such values to an appropriate
2308 font object, and stores that font object as the actual attribute
2309 value. If you specify a string, the contents of the string should be
2310 a font name (@pxref{Fonts,,, emacs, The GNU Emacs Manual}); if the
2311 font name is an XLFD containing wildcards, Emacs chooses the first
2312 font matching those wildcards. Specifying this attribute also changes
2313 the values of the @code{:family}, @code{:foundry}, @code{:width},
2314 @code{:height}, @code{:weight}, and @code{:slant} attributes.
2315
2316 @cindex inheritance, for faces
2317 @item :inherit
2318 The name of a face from which to inherit attributes, or a list of face
2319 names. Attributes from inherited faces are merged into the face like
2320 an underlying face would be, with higher priority than underlying
2321 faces (@pxref{Displaying Faces}). If a list of faces is used,
2322 attributes from faces earlier in the list override those from later
2323 faces.
2324 @end table
2325
2326 @defun font-family-list &optional frame
2327 This function returns a list of available font family names. The
2328 optional argument @var{frame} specifies the frame on which the text is
2329 to be displayed; if it is @code{nil}, the selected frame is used.
2330 @end defun
2331
2332 @defopt underline-minimum-offset
2333 This variable specifies the minimum distance between the baseline and
2334 the underline, in pixels, when displaying underlined text.
2335 @end defopt
2336
2337 @defopt x-bitmap-file-path
2338 This variable specifies a list of directories for searching
2339 for bitmap files, for the @code{:stipple} attribute.
2340 @end defopt
2341
2342 @defun bitmap-spec-p object
2343 This returns @code{t} if @var{object} is a valid bitmap specification,
2344 suitable for use with @code{:stipple} (see above). It returns
2345 @code{nil} otherwise.
2346 @end defun
2347
2348 @node Defining Faces
2349 @subsection Defining Faces
2350 @cindex defining faces
2351
2352 @cindex face spec
2353 The usual way to define a face is through the @code{defface} macro.
2354 This macro associates a face name (a symbol) with a default @dfn{face
2355 spec}. A face spec is a construct which specifies what attributes a
2356 face should have on any given terminal; for example, a face spec might
2357 specify one foreground color on high-color terminals, and a different
2358 foreground color on low-color terminals.
2359
2360 People are sometimes tempted to create a variable whose value is a
2361 face name. In the vast majority of cases, this is not necessary; the
2362 usual procedure is to define a face with @code{defface}, and then use
2363 its name directly.
2364
2365 @defmac defface face spec doc [keyword value]@dots{}
2366 This macro declares @var{face} as a named face whose default face spec
2367 is given by @var{spec}. You should not quote the symbol @var{face},
2368 and it should not end in @samp{-face} (that would be redundant). The
2369 argument @var{doc} is a documentation string for the face. The
2370 additional @var{keyword} arguments have the same meanings as in
2371 @code{defgroup} and @code{defcustom} (@pxref{Common Keywords}).
2372
2373 If @var{face} already has a default face spec, this macro does
2374 nothing.
2375
2376 The default face spec determines @var{face}'s appearance when no
2377 customizations are in effect (@pxref{Customization}). If @var{face}
2378 has already been customized (via Custom themes or via customizations
2379 read from the init file), its appearance is determined by the custom
2380 face spec(s), which override the default face spec @var{spec}.
2381 However, if the customizations are subsequently removed, the
2382 appearance of @var{face} will again be determined by its default face
2383 spec.
2384
2385 As an exception, if you evaluate a @code{defface} form with
2386 @kbd{C-M-x} in Emacs Lisp mode (@code{eval-defun}), a special feature
2387 of @code{eval-defun} overrides any custom face specs on the face,
2388 causing the face to reflect exactly what the @code{defface} says.
2389
2390 The @var{spec} argument is a @dfn{face spec}, which states how the
2391 face should appear on different kinds of terminals. It should be an
2392 alist whose elements each have the form
2393
2394 @example
2395 (@var{display} . @var{plist})
2396 @end example
2397
2398 @noindent
2399 @var{display} specifies a class of terminals (see below). @var{plist}
2400 is a property list of face attributes and their values, specifying how
2401 the face appears on such terminals. For backward compatibility, you
2402 can also write an element as @code{(@var{display} @var{plist})}.
2403
2404 The @var{display} part of an element of @var{spec} determines which
2405 terminals the element matches. If more than one element of @var{spec}
2406 matches a given terminal, the first element that matches is the one
2407 used for that terminal. There are three possibilities for
2408 @var{display}:
2409
2410 @table @asis
2411 @item @code{default}
2412 This element of @var{spec} doesn't match any terminal; instead, it
2413 specifies defaults that apply to all terminals. This element, if
2414 used, must be the first element of @var{spec}. Each of the following
2415 elements can override any or all of these defaults.
2416
2417 @item @code{t}
2418 This element of @var{spec} matches all terminals. Therefore, any
2419 subsequent elements of @var{spec} are never used. Normally @code{t}
2420 is used in the last (or only) element of @var{spec}.
2421
2422 @item a list
2423 If @var{display} is a list, each element should have the form
2424 @code{(@var{characteristic} @var{value}@dots{})}. Here
2425 @var{characteristic} specifies a way of classifying terminals, and the
2426 @var{value}s are possible classifications which @var{display} should
2427 apply to. Here are the possible values of @var{characteristic}:
2428
2429 @table @code
2430 @item type
2431 The kind of window system the terminal uses---either @code{graphic}
2432 (any graphics-capable display), @code{x}, @code{pc} (for the MS-DOS
2433 console), @code{w32} (for MS Windows 9X/NT/2K/XP), or @code{tty} (a
2434 non-graphics-capable display). @xref{Window Systems, window-system}.
2435
2436 @item class
2437 What kinds of colors the terminal supports---either @code{color},
2438 @code{grayscale}, or @code{mono}.
2439
2440 @item background
2441 The kind of background---either @code{light} or @code{dark}.
2442
2443 @item min-colors
2444 An integer that represents the minimum number of colors the terminal
2445 should support. This matches a terminal if its
2446 @code{display-color-cells} value is at least the specified integer.
2447
2448 @item supports
2449 Whether or not the terminal can display the face attributes given in
2450 @var{value}@dots{} (@pxref{Face Attributes}). @xref{Display Face
2451 Attribute Testing}, for more information on exactly how this testing
2452 is done.
2453 @end table
2454
2455 If an element of @var{display} specifies more than one @var{value} for
2456 a given @var{characteristic}, any of those values is acceptable. If
2457 @var{display} has more than one element, each element should specify a
2458 different @var{characteristic}; then @emph{each} characteristic of the
2459 terminal must match one of the @var{value}s specified for it in
2460 @var{display}.
2461 @end table
2462 @end defmac
2463
2464 For example, here's the definition of the standard face
2465 @code{highlight}:
2466
2467 @example
2468 (defface highlight
2469 '((((class color) (min-colors 88) (background light))
2470 :background "darkseagreen2")
2471 (((class color) (min-colors 88) (background dark))
2472 :background "darkolivegreen")
2473 (((class color) (min-colors 16) (background light))
2474 :background "darkseagreen2")
2475 (((class color) (min-colors 16) (background dark))
2476 :background "darkolivegreen")
2477 (((class color) (min-colors 8))
2478 :background "green" :foreground "black")
2479 (t :inverse-video t))
2480 "Basic face for highlighting."
2481 :group 'basic-faces)
2482 @end example
2483
2484 Internally, Emacs stores each face's default spec in its
2485 @code{face-defface-spec} symbol property (@pxref{Symbol Properties}).
2486 The @code{saved-face} property stores any face spec saved by the user
2487 using the customization buffer; the @code{customized-face} property
2488 stores the face spec customized for the current session, but not
2489 saved; and the @code{theme-face} property stores an alist associating
2490 the active customization settings and Custom themes with the face
2491 specs for that face. The face's documentation string is stored in the
2492 @code{face-documentation} property.
2493
2494 Normally, a face is declared just once, using @code{defface}, and
2495 any further changes to its appearance are applied using the Customize
2496 framework (e.g., via the Customize user interface or via the
2497 @code{custom-set-faces} function; @pxref{Applying Customizations}), or
2498 by face remapping (@pxref{Face Remapping}). In the rare event that
2499 you need to change a face spec directly from Lisp, you can use the
2500 @code{face-spec-set} function.
2501
2502 @defun face-spec-set face spec &optional spec-type
2503 This function applies @var{spec} as a face spec for @code{face}.
2504 @var{spec} should be a face spec, as described in the above
2505 documentation for @code{defface}.
2506
2507 This function also defines @var{face} as a valid face name if it is
2508 not already one, and (re)calculates its attributes on existing frames.
2509
2510 @cindex override spec @r{(for a face)}
2511 The argument @var{spec-type} determines which spec to set. If it is
2512 @code{nil} or @code{face-override-spec}, this function sets the
2513 @dfn{override spec}, which overrides over all other face specs on
2514 @var{face}. If it is @code{customized-face} or @code{saved-face},
2515 this function sets the customized spec or the saved custom spec. If
2516 it is @code{face-defface-spec}, this function sets the default face
2517 spec (the same one set by @code{defface}). If it is @code{reset},
2518 this function clears out all customization specs and override specs
2519 from @var{face} (in this case, the value of @var{spec} is ignored).
2520 Any other value of @var{spec-type} is reserved for internal use.
2521 @end defun
2522
2523 @node Attribute Functions
2524 @subsection Face Attribute Functions
2525 @cindex face attributes, access and modification
2526
2527 This section describes functions for directly accessing and
2528 modifying the attributes of a named face.
2529
2530 @defun face-attribute face attribute &optional frame inherit
2531 This function returns the value of the @var{attribute} attribute for
2532 @var{face} on @var{frame}.
2533
2534 If @var{frame} is @code{nil}, that means the selected frame
2535 (@pxref{Input Focus}). If @var{frame} is @code{t}, this function
2536 returns the value of the specified attribute for newly-created frames
2537 (this is normally @code{unspecified}, unless you have specified some
2538 value using @code{set-face-attribute}; see below).
2539
2540 If @var{inherit} is @code{nil}, only attributes directly defined by
2541 @var{face} are considered, so the return value may be
2542 @code{unspecified}, or a relative value. If @var{inherit} is
2543 non-@code{nil}, @var{face}'s definition of @var{attribute} is merged
2544 with the faces specified by its @code{:inherit} attribute; however the
2545 return value may still be @code{unspecified} or relative. If
2546 @var{inherit} is a face or a list of faces, then the result is further
2547 merged with that face (or faces), until it becomes specified and
2548 absolute.
2549
2550 To ensure that the return value is always specified and absolute, use
2551 a value of @code{default} for @var{inherit}; this will resolve any
2552 unspecified or relative values by merging with the @code{default} face
2553 (which is always completely specified).
2554
2555 For example,
2556
2557 @example
2558 (face-attribute 'bold :weight)
2559 @result{} bold
2560 @end example
2561 @end defun
2562
2563 @c FIXME: Add an index for "relative face attribute", maybe here? --xfq
2564 @defun face-attribute-relative-p attribute value
2565 This function returns non-@code{nil} if @var{value}, when used as the
2566 value of the face attribute @var{attribute}, is relative. This means
2567 it would modify, rather than completely override, any value that comes
2568 from a subsequent face in the face list or that is inherited from
2569 another face.
2570
2571 @code{unspecified} is a relative value for all attributes. For
2572 @code{:height}, floating point and function values are also relative.
2573
2574 For example:
2575
2576 @example
2577 (face-attribute-relative-p :height 2.0)
2578 @result{} t
2579 @end example
2580 @end defun
2581
2582 @defun face-all-attributes face &optional frame
2583 This function returns an alist of attributes of @var{face}. The
2584 elements of the result are name-value pairs of the form
2585 @w{@code{(@var{attr-name} . @var{attr-value})}}. Optional argument
2586 @var{frame} specifies the frame whose definition of @var{face} to
2587 return; if omitted or @code{nil}, the returned value describes the
2588 default attributes of @var{face} for newly created frames.
2589 @end defun
2590
2591 @defun merge-face-attribute attribute value1 value2
2592 If @var{value1} is a relative value for the face attribute
2593 @var{attribute}, returns it merged with the underlying value
2594 @var{value2}; otherwise, if @var{value1} is an absolute value for the
2595 face attribute @var{attribute}, returns @var{value1} unchanged.
2596 @end defun
2597
2598 Normally, Emacs uses the face specs of each face to automatically
2599 calculate its attributes on each frame (@pxref{Defining Faces}). The
2600 function @code{set-face-attribute} can override this calculation by
2601 directly assigning attributes to a face, either on a specific frame or
2602 for all frames. This function is mostly intended for internal usage.
2603
2604 @defun set-face-attribute face frame &rest arguments
2605 This function sets one or more attributes of @var{face} for
2606 @var{frame}. The attributes specifies in this way override the face
2607 spec(s) belonging to @var{face}.
2608
2609 The extra arguments @var{arguments} specify the attributes to set, and
2610 the values for them. They should consist of alternating attribute
2611 names (such as @code{:family} or @code{:underline}) and values. Thus,
2612
2613 @example
2614 (set-face-attribute 'foo nil :weight 'bold :slant 'italic)
2615 @end example
2616
2617 @noindent
2618 sets the attribute @code{:weight} to @code{bold} and the attribute
2619 @code{:slant} to @code{italic}.
2620
2621
2622 If @var{frame} is @code{t}, this function sets the default attributes
2623 for newly created frames. If @var{frame} is @code{nil}, this function
2624 sets the attributes for all existing frames, as well as for newly
2625 created frames.
2626 @end defun
2627
2628 The following commands and functions mostly provide compatibility
2629 with old versions of Emacs. They work by calling
2630 @code{set-face-attribute}. Values of @code{t} and @code{nil} for
2631 their @var{frame} argument are handled just like
2632 @code{set-face-attribute} and @code{face-attribute}. The commands
2633 read their arguments using the minibuffer, if called interactively.
2634
2635 @deffn Command set-face-foreground face color &optional frame
2636 @deffnx Command set-face-background face color &optional frame
2637 These set the @code{:foreground} attribute (or @code{:background}
2638 attribute, respectively) of @var{face} to @var{color}.
2639 @end deffn
2640
2641 @deffn Command set-face-stipple face pattern &optional frame
2642 This sets the @code{:stipple} attribute of @var{face} to
2643 @var{pattern}.
2644 @end deffn
2645
2646 @deffn Command set-face-font face font &optional frame
2647 This sets the @code{:font} attribute of @var{face} to @var{font}.
2648 @end deffn
2649
2650 @defun set-face-bold face bold-p &optional frame
2651 This sets the @code{:weight} attribute of @var{face} to @var{normal}
2652 if @var{bold-p} is @code{nil}, and to @var{bold} otherwise.
2653 @end defun
2654
2655 @defun set-face-italic face italic-p &optional frame
2656 This sets the @code{:slant} attribute of @var{face} to @var{normal} if
2657 @var{italic-p} is @code{nil}, and to @var{italic} otherwise.
2658 @end defun
2659
2660 @defun set-face-underline face underline &optional frame
2661 This sets the @code{:underline} attribute of @var{face} to
2662 @var{underline}.
2663 @end defun
2664
2665 @defun set-face-inverse-video face inverse-video-p &optional frame
2666 This sets the @code{:inverse-video} attribute of @var{face} to
2667 @var{inverse-video-p}.
2668 @end defun
2669
2670 @deffn Command invert-face face &optional frame
2671 This swaps the foreground and background colors of face @var{face}.
2672 @end deffn
2673
2674 The following functions examine the attributes of a face. They
2675 mostly provide compatibility with old versions of Emacs. If you don't
2676 specify @var{frame}, they refer to the selected frame; @code{t} refers
2677 to the default data for new frames. They return @code{unspecified} if
2678 the face doesn't define any value for that attribute. If
2679 @var{inherit} is @code{nil}, only an attribute directly defined by the
2680 face is returned. If @var{inherit} is non-@code{nil}, any faces
2681 specified by its @code{:inherit} attribute are considered as well, and
2682 if @var{inherit} is a face or a list of faces, then they are also
2683 considered, until a specified attribute is found. To ensure that the
2684 return value is always specified, use a value of @code{default} for
2685 @var{inherit}.
2686
2687 @defun face-font face &optional frame
2688 This function returns the name of the font of face @var{face}.
2689 @end defun
2690
2691 @defun face-foreground face &optional frame inherit
2692 @defunx face-background face &optional frame inherit
2693 These functions return the foreground color (or background color,
2694 respectively) of face @var{face}, as a string.
2695 @end defun
2696
2697 @defun face-stipple face &optional frame inherit
2698 This function returns the name of the background stipple pattern of face
2699 @var{face}, or @code{nil} if it doesn't have one.
2700 @end defun
2701
2702 @defun face-bold-p face &optional frame inherit
2703 This function returns a non-@code{nil} value if the @code{:weight}
2704 attribute of @var{face} is bolder than normal (i.e., one of
2705 @code{semi-bold}, @code{bold}, @code{extra-bold}, or
2706 @code{ultra-bold}). Otherwise, it returns @code{nil}.
2707 @end defun
2708
2709 @defun face-italic-p face &optional frame inherit
2710 This function returns a non-@code{nil} value if the @code{:slant}
2711 attribute of @var{face} is @code{italic} or @code{oblique}, and
2712 @code{nil} otherwise.
2713 @end defun
2714
2715 @defun face-underline-p face &optional frame inherit
2716 This function returns non-@code{nil} if face @var{face} specifies
2717 a non-@code{nil} @code{:underline} attribute.
2718 @end defun
2719
2720 @defun face-inverse-video-p face &optional frame inherit
2721 This function returns non-@code{nil} if face @var{face} specifies
2722 a non-@code{nil} @code{:inverse-video} attribute.
2723 @end defun
2724
2725 @node Displaying Faces
2726 @subsection Displaying Faces
2727 @cindex displaying faces
2728 @cindex face merging
2729
2730 When Emacs displays a given piece of text, the visual appearance of
2731 the text may be determined by faces drawn from different sources. If
2732 these various sources together specify more than one face for a
2733 particular character, Emacs merges the attributes of the various
2734 faces. Here is the order in which Emacs merges the faces, from
2735 highest to lowest priority:
2736
2737 @itemize @bullet
2738 @item
2739 If the text consists of a special glyph, the glyph can specify a
2740 particular face. @xref{Glyphs}.
2741
2742 @item
2743 If the text lies within an active region, Emacs highlights it using
2744 the @code{region} face. @xref{Standard Faces,,, emacs, The GNU Emacs
2745 Manual}.
2746
2747 @item
2748 If the text lies within an overlay with a non-@code{nil} @code{face}
2749 property, Emacs applies the face(s) specified by that property. If
2750 the overlay has a @code{mouse-face} property and the mouse is near
2751 enough to the overlay, Emacs applies the face or face attributes
2752 specified by the @code{mouse-face} property instead. @xref{Overlay
2753 Properties}.
2754
2755 When multiple overlays cover one character, an overlay with higher
2756 priority overrides those with lower priority. @xref{Overlays}.
2757
2758 @item
2759 If the text contains a @code{face} or @code{mouse-face} property,
2760 Emacs applies the specified faces and face attributes. @xref{Special
2761 Properties}. (This is how Font Lock mode faces are applied.
2762 @xref{Font Lock Mode}.)
2763
2764 @item
2765 If the text lies within the mode line of the selected window, Emacs
2766 applies the @code{mode-line} face. For the mode line of a
2767 non-selected window, Emacs applies the @code{mode-line-inactive} face.
2768 For a header line, Emacs applies the @code{header-line} face.
2769
2770 @item
2771 If any given attribute has not been specified during the preceding
2772 steps, Emacs applies the attribute of the @code{default} face.
2773 @end itemize
2774
2775 At each stage, if a face has a valid @code{:inherit} attribute,
2776 Emacs treats any attribute with an @code{unspecified} value as having
2777 the corresponding value drawn from the parent face(s). @pxref{Face
2778 Attributes}. Note that the parent face(s) may also leave the
2779 attribute unspecified; in that case, the attribute remains unspecified
2780 at the next level of face merging.
2781
2782 @node Face Remapping
2783 @subsection Face Remapping
2784 @cindex face remapping
2785
2786 The variable @code{face-remapping-alist} is used for buffer-local or
2787 global changes in the appearance of a face. For instance, it is used
2788 to implement the @code{text-scale-adjust} command (@pxref{Text
2789 Scale,,, emacs, The GNU Emacs Manual}).
2790
2791 @defvar face-remapping-alist
2792 The value of this variable is an alist whose elements have the form
2793 @code{(@var{face} . @var{remapping})}. This causes Emacs to display
2794 any text having the face @var{face} with @var{remapping}, rather than
2795 the ordinary definition of @var{face}.
2796
2797 @var{remapping} may be any face spec suitable for a @code{face} text
2798 property: either a face (i.e., a face name or a property list of
2799 attribute/value pairs), or a list of faces. For details, see the
2800 description of the @code{face} text property in @ref{Special
2801 Properties}. @var{remapping} serves as the complete specification for
2802 the remapped face---it replaces the normal definition of @var{face},
2803 instead of modifying it.
2804
2805 If @code{face-remapping-alist} is buffer-local, its local value takes
2806 effect only within that buffer.
2807
2808 Note: face remapping is non-recursive. If @var{remapping} references
2809 the same face name @var{face}, either directly or via the
2810 @code{:inherit} attribute of some other face in @var{remapping}, that
2811 reference uses the normal definition of @var{face}. For instance, if
2812 the @code{mode-line} face is remapped using this entry in
2813 @code{face-remapping-alist}:
2814
2815 @example
2816 (mode-line italic mode-line)
2817 @end example
2818
2819 @noindent
2820 then the new definition of the @code{mode-line} face inherits from the
2821 @code{italic} face, and the @emph{normal} (non-remapped) definition of
2822 @code{mode-line} face.
2823 @end defvar
2824
2825 @cindex relative remapping, faces
2826 @cindex base remapping, faces
2827 The following functions implement a higher-level interface to
2828 @code{face-remapping-alist}. Most Lisp code should use these
2829 functions instead of setting @code{face-remapping-alist} directly, to
2830 avoid trampling on remappings applied elsewhere. These functions are
2831 intended for buffer-local remappings, so they all make
2832 @code{face-remapping-alist} buffer-local as a side-effect. They manage
2833 @code{face-remapping-alist} entries of the form
2834
2835 @example
2836 (@var{face} @var{relative-spec-1} @var{relative-spec-2} @var{...} @var{base-spec})
2837 @end example
2838
2839 @noindent
2840 where, as explained above, each of the @var{relative-spec-N} and
2841 @var{base-spec} is either a face name, or a property list of
2842 attribute/value pairs. Each of the @dfn{relative remapping} entries,
2843 @var{relative-spec-N}, is managed by the
2844 @code{face-remap-add-relative} and @code{face-remap-remove-relative}
2845 functions; these are intended for simple modifications like changing
2846 the text size. The @dfn{base remapping} entry, @var{base-spec}, has
2847 the lowest priority and is managed by the @code{face-remap-set-base}
2848 and @code{face-remap-reset-base} functions; it is intended for major
2849 modes to remap faces in the buffers they control.
2850
2851 @defun face-remap-add-relative face &rest specs
2852 This function adds the face spec in @var{specs} as relative
2853 remappings for face @var{face} in the current buffer. The remaining
2854 arguments, @var{specs}, should form either a list of face names, or a
2855 property list of attribute/value pairs.
2856
2857 The return value is a Lisp object that serves as a cookie; you can
2858 pass this object as an argument to @code{face-remap-remove-relative}
2859 if you need to remove the remapping later.
2860
2861 @example
2862 ;; Remap the 'escape-glyph' face into a combination
2863 ;; of the 'highlight' and 'italic' faces:
2864 (face-remap-add-relative 'escape-glyph 'highlight 'italic)
2865
2866 ;; Increase the size of the 'default' face by 50%:
2867 (face-remap-add-relative 'default :height 1.5)
2868 @end example
2869 @end defun
2870
2871 @defun face-remap-remove-relative cookie
2872 This function removes a relative remapping previously added by
2873 @code{face-remap-add-relative}. @var{cookie} should be the Lisp
2874 object returned by @code{face-remap-add-relative} when the remapping
2875 was added.
2876 @end defun
2877
2878 @defun face-remap-set-base face &rest specs
2879 This function sets the base remapping of @var{face} in the current
2880 buffer to @var{specs}. If @var{specs} is empty, the default base
2881 remapping is restored, similar to calling @code{face-remap-reset-base}
2882 (see below); note that this is different from @var{specs} containing a
2883 single value @code{nil}, which has the opposite result (the global
2884 definition of @var{face} is ignored).
2885
2886 This overwrites the default @var{base-spec}, which inherits the global
2887 face definition, so it is up to the caller to add such inheritance if
2888 so desired.
2889 @end defun
2890
2891 @defun face-remap-reset-base face
2892 This function sets the base remapping of @var{face} to its default
2893 value, which inherits from @var{face}'s global definition.
2894 @end defun
2895
2896 @node Face Functions
2897 @subsection Functions for Working with Faces
2898
2899 Here are additional functions for creating and working with faces.
2900
2901 @defun face-list
2902 This function returns a list of all defined face names.
2903 @end defun
2904
2905 @defun face-id face
2906 This function returns the @dfn{face number} of face @var{face}. This
2907 is a number that uniquely identifies a face at low levels within
2908 Emacs. It is seldom necessary to refer to a face by its face number.
2909 @end defun
2910
2911 @defun face-documentation face
2912 This function returns the documentation string of face @var{face}, or
2913 @code{nil} if none was specified for it.
2914 @end defun
2915
2916 @defun face-equal face1 face2 &optional frame
2917 This returns @code{t} if the faces @var{face1} and @var{face2} have the
2918 same attributes for display.
2919 @end defun
2920
2921 @defun face-differs-from-default-p face &optional frame
2922 This returns non-@code{nil} if the face @var{face} displays
2923 differently from the default face.
2924 @end defun
2925
2926 @cindex face alias
2927 @cindex alias, for faces
2928 A @dfn{face alias} provides an equivalent name for a face. You can
2929 define a face alias by giving the alias symbol the @code{face-alias}
2930 property, with a value of the target face name. The following example
2931 makes @code{modeline} an alias for the @code{mode-line} face.
2932
2933 @example
2934 (put 'modeline 'face-alias 'mode-line)
2935 @end example
2936
2937 @defmac define-obsolete-face-alias obsolete-face current-face when
2938 This macro defines @code{obsolete-face} as an alias for
2939 @var{current-face}, and also marks it as obsolete, indicating that it
2940 may be removed in future. @var{when} should be a string indicating
2941 when @code{obsolete-face} was made obsolete (usually a version number
2942 string).
2943 @end defmac
2944
2945 @node Auto Faces
2946 @subsection Automatic Face Assignment
2947 @cindex automatic face assignment
2948 @cindex faces, automatic choice
2949
2950 This hook is used for automatically assigning faces to text in the
2951 buffer. It is part of the implementation of Jit-Lock mode, used by
2952 Font-Lock.
2953
2954 @defvar fontification-functions
2955 This variable holds a list of functions that are called by Emacs
2956 redisplay as needed, just before doing redisplay. They are called even
2957 when Font Lock Mode isn't enabled. When Font Lock Mode is enabled, this
2958 variable usually holds just one function, @code{jit-lock-function}.
2959
2960 The functions are called in the order listed, with one argument, a
2961 buffer position @var{pos}. Collectively they should attempt to assign
2962 faces to the text in the current buffer starting at @var{pos}.
2963
2964 The functions should record the faces they assign by setting the
2965 @code{face} property. They should also add a non-@code{nil}
2966 @code{fontified} property to all the text they have assigned faces to.
2967 That property tells redisplay that faces have been assigned to that text
2968 already.
2969
2970 It is probably a good idea for the functions to do nothing if the
2971 character after @var{pos} already has a non-@code{nil} @code{fontified}
2972 property, but this is not required. If one function overrides the
2973 assignments made by a previous one, the properties after the last
2974 function finishes are the ones that really matter.
2975
2976 For efficiency, we recommend writing these functions so that they
2977 usually assign faces to around 400 to 600 characters at each call.
2978 @end defvar
2979
2980 @node Basic Faces
2981 @subsection Basic Faces
2982 @cindex basic faces
2983
2984 If your Emacs Lisp program needs to assign some faces to text, it is
2985 often a good idea to use certain existing faces or inherit from them,
2986 rather than defining entirely new faces. This way, if other users
2987 have customized the basic faces to give Emacs a certain look, your
2988 program will fit in without additional customization.
2989
2990 Some of the basic faces defined in Emacs are listed below. In
2991 addition to these, you might want to make use of the Font Lock faces
2992 for syntactic highlighting, if highlighting is not already handled by
2993 Font Lock mode, or if some Font Lock faces are not in use.
2994 @xref{Faces for Font Lock}.
2995
2996 @table @code
2997 @item default
2998 The default face, whose attributes are all specified. All other faces
2999 implicitly inherit from it: any unspecified attribute defaults to the
3000 attribute on this face (@pxref{Face Attributes}).
3001
3002 @item bold
3003 @itemx italic
3004 @itemx bold-italic
3005 @itemx underline
3006 @itemx fixed-pitch
3007 @itemx variable-pitch
3008 These have the attributes indicated by their names (e.g., @code{bold}
3009 has a bold @code{:weight} attribute), with all other attributes
3010 unspecified (and so given by @code{default}).
3011
3012 @item shadow
3013 For dimmed-out text. For example, it is used for the ignored
3014 part of a filename in the minibuffer (@pxref{Minibuffer File,,
3015 Minibuffers for File Names, emacs, The GNU Emacs Manual}).
3016
3017 @item link
3018 @itemx link-visited
3019 For clickable text buttons that send the user to a different
3020 buffer or location.
3021
3022 @item highlight
3023 For stretches of text that should temporarily stand out. For example,
3024 it is commonly assigned to the @code{mouse-face} property for cursor
3025 highlighting (@pxref{Special Properties}).
3026
3027 @item match
3028 For text matching a search command.
3029
3030 @item error
3031 @itemx warning
3032 @itemx success
3033 For text concerning errors, warnings, or successes. For example,
3034 these are used for messages in @file{*Compilation*} buffers.
3035 @end table
3036
3037 @node Font Selection
3038 @subsection Font Selection
3039 @cindex font selection
3040 @cindex selecting a font
3041
3042 Before Emacs can draw a character on a graphical display, it must
3043 select a @dfn{font} for that character@footnote{In this context, the
3044 term @dfn{font} has nothing to do with Font Lock (@pxref{Font Lock
3045 Mode}).}. @xref{Fonts,,, emacs, The GNU Emacs Manual}. Normally,
3046 Emacs automatically chooses a font based on the faces assigned to that
3047 character---specifically, the face attributes @code{:family},
3048 @code{:weight}, @code{:slant}, and @code{:width} (@pxref{Face
3049 Attributes}). The choice of font also depends on the character to be
3050 displayed; some fonts can only display a limited set of characters.
3051 If no available font exactly fits the requirements, Emacs looks for
3052 the @dfn{closest matching font}. The variables in this section
3053 control how Emacs makes this selection.
3054
3055 @defopt face-font-family-alternatives
3056 If a given family is specified but does not exist, this variable
3057 specifies alternative font families to try. Each element should have
3058 this form:
3059
3060 @example
3061 (@var{family} @var{alternate-families}@dots{})
3062 @end example
3063
3064 If @var{family} is specified but not available, Emacs will try the other
3065 families given in @var{alternate-families}, one by one, until it finds a
3066 family that does exist.
3067 @end defopt
3068
3069 @defopt face-font-selection-order
3070 If there is no font that exactly matches all desired face attributes
3071 (@code{:width}, @code{:height}, @code{:weight}, and @code{:slant}),
3072 this variable specifies the order in which these attributes should be
3073 considered when selecting the closest matching font. The value should
3074 be a list containing those four attribute symbols, in order of
3075 decreasing importance. The default is @code{(:width :height :weight
3076 :slant)}.
3077
3078 Font selection first finds the best available matches for the first
3079 attribute in the list; then, among the fonts which are best in that
3080 way, it searches for the best matches in the second attribute, and so
3081 on.
3082
3083 The attributes @code{:weight} and @code{:width} have symbolic values in
3084 a range centered around @code{normal}. Matches that are more extreme
3085 (farther from @code{normal}) are somewhat preferred to matches that are
3086 less extreme (closer to @code{normal}); this is designed to ensure that
3087 non-normal faces contrast with normal ones, whenever possible.
3088
3089 One example of a case where this variable makes a difference is when the
3090 default font has no italic equivalent. With the default ordering, the
3091 @code{italic} face will use a non-italic font that is similar to the
3092 default one. But if you put @code{:slant} before @code{:height}, the
3093 @code{italic} face will use an italic font, even if its height is not
3094 quite right.
3095 @end defopt
3096
3097 @defopt face-font-registry-alternatives
3098 This variable lets you specify alternative font registries to try, if a
3099 given registry is specified and doesn't exist. Each element should have
3100 this form:
3101
3102 @example
3103 (@var{registry} @var{alternate-registries}@dots{})
3104 @end example
3105
3106 If @var{registry} is specified but not available, Emacs will try the
3107 other registries given in @var{alternate-registries}, one by one,
3108 until it finds a registry that does exist.
3109 @end defopt
3110
3111 @cindex scalable fonts
3112 Emacs can make use of scalable fonts, but by default it does not use
3113 them.
3114
3115 @defopt scalable-fonts-allowed
3116 This variable controls which scalable fonts to use. A value of
3117 @code{nil}, the default, means do not use scalable fonts. @code{t}
3118 means to use any scalable font that seems appropriate for the text.
3119
3120 Otherwise, the value must be a list of regular expressions. Then a
3121 scalable font is enabled for use if its name matches any regular
3122 expression in the list. For example,
3123
3124 @example
3125 (setq scalable-fonts-allowed '("iso10646-1$"))
3126 @end example
3127
3128 @noindent
3129 allows the use of scalable fonts with registry @code{iso10646-1}.
3130 @end defopt
3131
3132 @defvar face-font-rescale-alist
3133 This variable specifies scaling for certain faces. Its value should
3134 be a list of elements of the form
3135
3136 @example
3137 (@var{fontname-regexp} . @var{scale-factor})
3138 @end example
3139
3140 If @var{fontname-regexp} matches the font name that is about to be
3141 used, this says to choose a larger similar font according to the
3142 factor @var{scale-factor}. You would use this feature to normalize
3143 the font size if certain fonts are bigger or smaller than their
3144 nominal heights and widths would suggest.
3145 @end defvar
3146
3147 @node Font Lookup
3148 @subsection Looking Up Fonts
3149 @cindex font lookup
3150 @cindex looking up fonts
3151
3152 @defun x-list-fonts name &optional reference-face frame maximum width
3153 This function returns a list of available font names that match
3154 @var{name}. @var{name} should be a string containing a font name in
3155 either the Fontconfig, GTK, or XLFD format (@pxref{Fonts,,, emacs, The
3156 GNU Emacs Manual}). Within an XLFD string, wildcard characters may be
3157 used: the @samp{*} character matches any substring, and the @samp{?}
3158 character matches any single character. Case is ignored when matching
3159 font names.
3160
3161 If the optional arguments @var{reference-face} and @var{frame} are
3162 specified, the returned list includes only fonts that are the same
3163 size as @var{reference-face} (a face name) currently is on the frame
3164 @var{frame}.
3165
3166 The optional argument @var{maximum} sets a limit on how many fonts to
3167 return. If it is non-@code{nil}, then the return value is truncated
3168 after the first @var{maximum} matching fonts. Specifying a small
3169 value for @var{maximum} can make this function much faster, in cases
3170 where many fonts match the pattern.
3171
3172 The optional argument @var{width} specifies a desired font width. If
3173 it is non-@code{nil}, the function only returns those fonts whose
3174 characters are (on average) @var{width} times as wide as
3175 @var{reference-face}.
3176 @end defun
3177
3178 @defun x-family-fonts &optional family frame
3179 This function returns a list describing the available fonts for family
3180 @var{family} on @var{frame}. If @var{family} is omitted or @code{nil},
3181 this list applies to all families, and therefore, it contains all
3182 available fonts. Otherwise, @var{family} must be a string; it may
3183 contain the wildcards @samp{?} and @samp{*}.
3184
3185 The list describes the display that @var{frame} is on; if @var{frame} is
3186 omitted or @code{nil}, it applies to the selected frame's display
3187 (@pxref{Input Focus}).
3188
3189 Each element in the list is a vector of the following form:
3190
3191 @example
3192 [@var{family} @var{width} @var{point-size} @var{weight} @var{slant}
3193 @var{fixed-p} @var{full} @var{registry-and-encoding}]
3194 @end example
3195
3196 The first five elements correspond to face attributes; if you
3197 specify these attributes for a face, it will use this font.
3198
3199 The last three elements give additional information about the font.
3200 @var{fixed-p} is non-@code{nil} if the font is fixed-pitch.
3201 @var{full} is the full name of the font, and
3202 @var{registry-and-encoding} is a string giving the registry and
3203 encoding of the font.
3204 @end defun
3205
3206 @node Fontsets
3207 @subsection Fontsets
3208 @cindex fontset
3209
3210 A @dfn{fontset} is a list of fonts, each assigned to a range of
3211 character codes. An individual font cannot display the whole range of
3212 characters that Emacs supports, but a fontset can. Fontsets have names,
3213 just as fonts do, and you can use a fontset name in place of a font name
3214 when you specify the font for a frame or a face. Here is
3215 information about defining a fontset under Lisp program control.
3216
3217 @defun create-fontset-from-fontset-spec fontset-spec &optional style-variant-p noerror
3218 This function defines a new fontset according to the specification
3219 string @var{fontset-spec}. The string should have this format:
3220
3221 @smallexample
3222 @var{fontpattern}, @r{[}@var{charset}:@var{font}@r{]@dots{}}
3223 @end smallexample
3224
3225 @noindent
3226 Whitespace characters before and after the commas are ignored.
3227
3228 The first part of the string, @var{fontpattern}, should have the form of
3229 a standard X font name, except that the last two fields should be
3230 @samp{fontset-@var{alias}}.
3231
3232 The new fontset has two names, one long and one short. The long name is
3233 @var{fontpattern} in its entirety. The short name is
3234 @samp{fontset-@var{alias}}. You can refer to the fontset by either
3235 name. If a fontset with the same name already exists, an error is
3236 signaled, unless @var{noerror} is non-@code{nil}, in which case this
3237 function does nothing.
3238
3239 If optional argument @var{style-variant-p} is non-@code{nil}, that says
3240 to create bold, italic and bold-italic variants of the fontset as well.
3241 These variant fontsets do not have a short name, only a long one, which
3242 is made by altering @var{fontpattern} to indicate the bold and/or italic
3243 status.
3244
3245 The specification string also says which fonts to use in the fontset.
3246 See below for the details.
3247 @end defun
3248
3249 The construct @samp{@var{charset}:@var{font}} specifies which font to
3250 use (in this fontset) for one particular character set. Here,
3251 @var{charset} is the name of a character set, and @var{font} is the font
3252 to use for that character set. You can use this construct any number of
3253 times in the specification string.
3254
3255 For the remaining character sets, those that you don't specify
3256 explicitly, Emacs chooses a font based on @var{fontpattern}: it replaces
3257 @samp{fontset-@var{alias}} with a value that names one character set.
3258 For the @acronym{ASCII} character set, @samp{fontset-@var{alias}} is replaced
3259 with @samp{ISO8859-1}.
3260
3261 In addition, when several consecutive fields are wildcards, Emacs
3262 collapses them into a single wildcard. This is to prevent use of
3263 auto-scaled fonts. Fonts made by scaling larger fonts are not usable
3264 for editing, and scaling a smaller font is not useful because it is
3265 better to use the smaller font in its own size, which Emacs does.
3266
3267 Thus if @var{fontpattern} is this,
3268
3269 @example
3270 -*-fixed-medium-r-normal-*-24-*-*-*-*-*-fontset-24
3271 @end example
3272
3273 @noindent
3274 the font specification for @acronym{ASCII} characters would be this:
3275
3276 @example
3277 -*-fixed-medium-r-normal-*-24-*-ISO8859-1
3278 @end example
3279
3280 @noindent
3281 and the font specification for Chinese GB2312 characters would be this:
3282
3283 @example
3284 -*-fixed-medium-r-normal-*-24-*-gb2312*-*
3285 @end example
3286
3287 You may not have any Chinese font matching the above font
3288 specification. Most X distributions include only Chinese fonts that
3289 have @samp{song ti} or @samp{fangsong ti} in the @var{family} field. In
3290 such a case, @samp{Fontset-@var{n}} can be specified as below:
3291
3292 @smallexample
3293 Emacs.Fontset-0: -*-fixed-medium-r-normal-*-24-*-*-*-*-*-fontset-24,\
3294 chinese-gb2312:-*-*-medium-r-normal-*-24-*-gb2312*-*
3295 @end smallexample
3296
3297 @noindent
3298 Then, the font specifications for all but Chinese GB2312 characters have
3299 @samp{fixed} in the @var{family} field, and the font specification for
3300 Chinese GB2312 characters has a wild card @samp{*} in the @var{family}
3301 field.
3302
3303 @defun set-fontset-font name character font-spec &optional frame add
3304 This function modifies the existing fontset @var{name} to use the font
3305 matching with @var{font-spec} for the specified @var{character}.
3306
3307 If @var{name} is @code{nil}, this function modifies the fontset of the
3308 selected frame or that of @var{frame} if @var{frame} is not
3309 @code{nil}.
3310
3311 If @var{name} is @code{t}, this function modifies the default
3312 fontset, whose short name is @samp{fontset-default}.
3313
3314 In addition to specifying a single codepoint, @var{character} may be a
3315 cons @code{(@var{from} . @var{to})}, where @var{from} and @var{to} are
3316 character codepoints. In that case, use @var{font-spec} for all the
3317 characters in the range @var{from} and @var{to} (inclusive).
3318
3319 @var{character} may be a charset. In that case, use
3320 @var{font-spec} for all character in the charsets.
3321
3322 @var{character} may be a script name. In that case, use
3323 @var{font-spec} for all character in the charsets.
3324
3325 @var{font-spec} may be a font-spec object created by the function
3326 @code{font-spec} (@pxref{Low-Level Font}).
3327
3328 @var{font-spec} may be a cons; @code{(@var{family} . @var{registry})},
3329 where @var{family} is a family name of a font (possibly including a
3330 foundry name at the head), @var{registry} is a registry name of a font
3331 (possibly including an encoding name at the tail).
3332
3333 @var{font-spec} may be a font name string.
3334
3335 @var{font-spec} may be @code{nil}, which explicitly specifies that
3336 there's no font for the specified @var{character}. This is useful,
3337 for example, to avoid expensive system-wide search for fonts for
3338 characters that have no glyphs, like those from the Unicode Private
3339 Use Area (PUA).
3340
3341 The optional argument @var{add}, if non-@code{nil}, specifies how to
3342 add @var{font-spec} to the font specifications previously set. If it
3343 is @code{prepend}, @var{font-spec} is prepended. If it is
3344 @code{append}, @var{font-spec} is appended. By default,
3345 @var{font-spec} overrides the previous settings.
3346
3347 For instance, this changes the default fontset to use a font of which
3348 family name is @samp{Kochi Gothic} for all characters belonging to
3349 the charset @code{japanese-jisx0208}.
3350
3351 @smallexample
3352 (set-fontset-font t 'japanese-jisx0208
3353 (font-spec :family "Kochi Gothic"))
3354 @end smallexample
3355 @end defun
3356
3357 @defun char-displayable-p char
3358 This function returns @code{t} if Emacs ought to be able to display
3359 @var{char}. More precisely, if the selected frame's fontset has a
3360 font to display the character set that @var{char} belongs to.
3361
3362 Fontsets can specify a font on a per-character basis; when the fontset
3363 does that, this function's value may not be accurate.
3364 @end defun
3365
3366 @node Low-Level Font
3367 @subsection Low-Level Font Representation
3368 @cindex font property
3369
3370 Normally, it is not necessary to manipulate fonts directly. In case
3371 you need to do so, this section explains how.
3372
3373 In Emacs Lisp, fonts are represented using three different Lisp
3374 object types: @dfn{font objects}, @dfn{font specs}, and @dfn{font
3375 entities}.
3376
3377 @defun fontp object &optional type
3378 Return @code{t} if @var{object} is a font object, font spec, or font
3379 entity. Otherwise, return @code{nil}.
3380
3381 The optional argument @var{type}, if non-@code{nil}, determines the
3382 exact type of Lisp object to check for. In that case, @var{type}
3383 should be one of @code{font-object}, @code{font-spec}, or
3384 @code{font-entity}.
3385 @end defun
3386
3387 @cindex font object
3388 A font object is a Lisp object that represents a font that Emacs has
3389 @dfn{opened}. Font objects cannot be modified in Lisp, but they can
3390 be inspected.
3391
3392 @defun font-at position &optional window string
3393 Return the font object that is being used to display the character at
3394 position @var{position} in the window @var{window}. If @var{window}
3395 is @code{nil}, it defaults to the selected window. If @var{string} is
3396 @code{nil}, @var{position} specifies a position in the current buffer;
3397 otherwise, @var{string} should be a string, and @var{position}
3398 specifies a position in that string.
3399 @end defun
3400
3401 @cindex font spec
3402 A font spec is a Lisp object that contains a set of specifications
3403 that can be used to find a font. More than one font may match the
3404 specifications in a font spec.
3405
3406 @defun font-spec &rest arguments
3407 Return a new font spec using the specifications in @var{arguments},
3408 which should come in @code{property}-@code{value} pairs. The possible
3409 specifications are as follows:
3410
3411 @table @code
3412 @item :name
3413 The font name (a string), in either XLFD, Fontconfig, or GTK format.
3414 @xref{Fonts,,, emacs, The GNU Emacs Manual}.
3415
3416 @item :family
3417 @itemx :foundry
3418 @itemx :weight
3419 @itemx :slant
3420 @itemx :width
3421 These have the same meanings as the face attributes of the same name.
3422 @xref{Face Attributes}.
3423
3424 @item :size
3425 The font size---either a non-negative integer that specifies the pixel
3426 size, or a floating-point number that specifies the point size.
3427
3428 @item :adstyle
3429 Additional typographic style information for the font, such as
3430 @samp{sans}. The value should be a string or a symbol.
3431
3432 @cindex font registry
3433 @item :registry
3434 The charset registry and encoding of the font, such as
3435 @samp{iso8859-1}. The value should be a string or a symbol.
3436
3437 @item :script
3438 The script that the font must support (a symbol).
3439
3440 @item :lang
3441 The language that the font should support. The value should be a
3442 symbol whose name is a two-letter ISO-639 language name. On X, the
3443 value is matched against the ``Additional Style'' field of the XLFD
3444 name of a font, if it is non-empty. On MS-Windows, fonts matching the
3445 spec are required to support codepages needed for the language.
3446 Currently, only a small set of CJK languages is supported with this
3447 property: @samp{ja}, @samp{ko}, and @samp{zh}.
3448
3449 @item :otf
3450 @cindex OpenType font
3451 The font must be an OpenType font that supports these OpenType
3452 features, provided Emacs is compiled with a library, such as
3453 @samp{libotf} on GNU/Linux, that supports complex text layout for
3454 scripts which need that. The value must be a list of the form
3455
3456 @smallexample
3457 @code{(@var{script-tag} @var{langsys-tag} @var{gsub} @var{gpos})}
3458 @end smallexample
3459
3460 where @var{script-tag} is the OpenType script tag symbol;
3461 @var{langsys-tag} is the OpenType language system tag symbol, or
3462 @code{nil} to use the default language system; @code{gsub} is a list
3463 of OpenType GSUB feature tag symbols, or @code{nil} if none is
3464 required; and @code{gpos} is a list of OpenType GPOS feature tag
3465 symbols, or @code{nil} if none is required. If @code{gsub} or
3466 @code{gpos} is a list, a @code{nil} element in that list means that
3467 the font must not match any of the remaining tag symbols. The
3468 @code{gpos} element may be omitted.
3469 @end table
3470 @end defun
3471
3472 @defun font-put font-spec property value
3473 Set the font property @var{property} in the font-spec @var{font-spec}
3474 to @var{value}.
3475 @end defun
3476
3477 @cindex font entity
3478 A font entity is a reference to a font that need not be open. Its
3479 properties are intermediate between a font object and a font spec:
3480 like a font object, and unlike a font spec, it refers to a single,
3481 specific font. Unlike a font object, creating a font entity does not
3482 load the contents of that font into computer memory. Emacs may open
3483 multiple font objects of different sizes from a single font entity
3484 referring to a scalable font.
3485
3486 @defun find-font font-spec &optional frame
3487 This function returns a font entity that best matches the font spec
3488 @var{font-spec} on frame @var{frame}. If @var{frame} is @code{nil},
3489 it defaults to the selected frame.
3490 @end defun
3491
3492 @defun list-fonts font-spec &optional frame num prefer
3493 This function returns a list of all font entities that match the font
3494 spec @var{font-spec}.
3495
3496 The optional argument @var{frame}, if non-@code{nil}, specifies the
3497 frame on which the fonts are to be displayed. The optional argument
3498 @var{num}, if non-@code{nil}, should be an integer that specifies the
3499 maximum length of the returned list. The optional argument
3500 @var{prefer}, if non-@code{nil}, should be another font spec, which is
3501 used to control the order of the returned list; the returned font
3502 entities are sorted in order of decreasing closeness to that font
3503 spec.
3504 @end defun
3505
3506 If you call @code{set-face-attribute} and pass a font spec, font
3507 entity, or font name string as the value of the @code{:font}
3508 attribute, Emacs opens the best matching font that is available
3509 for display. It then stores the corresponding font object as the
3510 actual value of the @code{:font} attribute for that face.
3511
3512 The following functions can be used to obtain information about a
3513 font. For these functions, the @var{font} argument can be a font
3514 object, a font entity, or a font spec.
3515
3516 @defun font-get font property
3517 This function returns the value of the font property @var{property}
3518 for @var{font}.
3519
3520 If @var{font} is a font spec and the font spec does not specify
3521 @var{property}, the return value is @code{nil}. If @var{font} is a
3522 font object or font entity, the value for the @var{:script} property
3523 may be a list of scripts supported by the font.
3524 @end defun
3525
3526 @defun font-face-attributes font &optional frame
3527 This function returns a list of face attributes corresponding to
3528 @var{font}. The optional argument @var{frame} specifies the frame on
3529 which the font is to be displayed. If it is @code{nil}, the selected
3530 frame is used. The return value has the form
3531
3532 @smallexample
3533 (:family @var{family} :height @var{height} :weight @var{weight}
3534 :slant @var{slant} :width @var{width})
3535 @end smallexample
3536
3537 where the values of @var{family}, @var{height}, @var{weight},
3538 @var{slant}, and @var{width} are face attribute values. Some of these
3539 key-attribute pairs may be omitted from the list if they are not
3540 specified by @var{font}.
3541 @end defun
3542
3543 @defun font-xlfd-name font &optional fold-wildcards
3544 This function returns the XLFD (X Logical Font Descriptor), a string,
3545 matching @var{font}. @xref{Fonts,,, emacs, The GNU Emacs Manual}, for
3546 information about XLFDs. If the name is too long for an XLFD (which
3547 can contain at most 255 characters), the function returns @code{nil}.
3548
3549 If the optional argument @var{fold-wildcards} is non-@code{nil},
3550 consecutive wildcards in the XLFD are folded into one.
3551 @end defun
3552
3553 The following two functions return important information about a font.
3554
3555 @defun font-info name &optional frame
3556 This function returns information about a font specified by its
3557 @var{name}, a string, as it is used on @var{frame}. If @var{frame} is
3558 omitted or @code{nil}, it defaults to the selected frame.
3559
3560 The value returned by the function is a vector of the form
3561 @code{[@var{opened-name} @var{full-name} @var{size} @var{height}
3562 @var{baseline-offset} @var{relative-compose} @var{default-ascent}
3563 @var{max-width} @var{ascent} @var{descent} @var{space-width}
3564 @var{average-width} @var{filename} @var{capability}]}. Here's the
3565 description of each components of this vector:
3566
3567 @table @var
3568 @item opened-name
3569 The name used to open the font, a string.
3570
3571 @item full-name
3572 The full name of the font, a string.
3573
3574 @item size
3575 The pixel size of the font.
3576
3577 @item height
3578 The height of the font in pixels.
3579
3580 @item baseline-offset
3581 The offset in pixels from the @acronym{ASCII} baseline, positive
3582 upward.
3583
3584 @item relative-compose
3585 @itemx default-ascent
3586 Numbers controlling how to compose characters.
3587
3588 @item ascent
3589 @itemx descent
3590 The ascent and descent of this font. The sum of these two numbers
3591 should be equal to the value of @var{height} above.
3592
3593 @item space-width
3594 The width, in pixels, of the font's space character.
3595
3596 @item average-width
3597 The average width of the font characters. If this is zero, Emacs uses
3598 the value of @var{space-width} instead, when it calculates text layout
3599 on display.
3600
3601 @item filename
3602 The file name of the font as a string. This can be @code{nil} if the
3603 font back-end does not provide a way to find out the font's file name.
3604
3605 @item capability
3606 A list whose first element is a symbol representing the font type, one
3607 of @code{x}, @code{opentype}, @code{truetype}, @code{type1},
3608 @code{pcf}, or @code{bdf}. For OpenType fonts, the list includes 2
3609 additional elements describing the @sc{gsub} and @sc{gpos} features
3610 supported by the font. Each of these elements is a list of the form
3611 @code{((@var{script} (@var{langsys} @var{feature} @dots{}) @dots{})
3612 @dots{})}, where @var{script} is a symbol representing an OpenType
3613 script tag, @var{langsys} is a symbol representing an OpenType langsys
3614 tag (or @code{nil}, which stands for the default langsys), and each
3615 @var{feature} is a symbol representing an OpenType feature tag.
3616 @end table
3617 @end defun
3618
3619 @defun query-font font-object
3620 This function returns information about a @var{font-object}. (This is
3621 in contrast to @code{font-info}, which takes the font name, a string,
3622 as its argument.)
3623
3624 The value returned by the function is a vector of the form
3625 @code{[@var{name} @var{filename} @var{pixel-size} @var{max-width}
3626 @var{ascent} @var{descent} @var{space-width} @var{average-width}
3627 @var{capability}]}. Here's the description of each components of this
3628 vector:
3629
3630 @table @var
3631 @item name
3632 The font name, a string.
3633
3634 @item filename
3635 The file name of the font as a string. This can be @code{nil} if the
3636 font back-end does not provide a way to find out the font's file name.
3637
3638 @item pixel-size
3639 The pixel size of the font used to open the font.
3640
3641 @item max-width
3642 The maximum advance width of the font.
3643
3644 @item ascent
3645 @itemx descent
3646 The ascent and descent of this font. The sum of these two numbers
3647 gives the font height.
3648
3649 @item space-width
3650 The width, in pixels, of the font's space character.
3651
3652 @item average-width
3653 The average width of the font characters. If this is zero, Emacs uses
3654 the value of @var{space-width} instead, when it calculates text layout
3655 on display.
3656
3657 @item capability
3658 A list whose first element is a symbol representing the font type, one
3659 of @code{x}, @code{opentype}, @code{truetype}, @code{type1},
3660 @code{pcf}, or @code{bdf}. For OpenType fonts, the list includes 2
3661 additional elements describing the @sc{gsub} and @sc{gpos} features
3662 supported by the font. Each of these elements is a list of the form
3663 @code{((@var{script} (@var{langsys} @var{feature} @dots{}) @dots{})
3664 @dots{})}, where @var{script} is a symbol representing an OpenType
3665 script tag, @var{langsys} is a symbol representing an OpenType langsys
3666 tag (or @code{nil}, which stands for the default langsys), and each
3667 @var{feature} is a symbol representing an OpenType feature tag.
3668 @end table
3669 @end defun
3670
3671 @cindex font information for layout
3672 The following four functions return size information about fonts used
3673 by various faces, allowing various layout considerations in Lisp
3674 programs. These functions take face remapping into consideration,
3675 returning information about the remapped face, if the face in question
3676 was remapped. @xref{Face Remapping}.
3677
3678 @defun default-font-width
3679 This function returns the average width in pixels of the font used by
3680 the current buffer's default face.
3681 @end defun
3682
3683 @defun default-font-height
3684 This function returns the height in pixels of the font used by the
3685 current buffer's default face.
3686 @end defun
3687
3688 @defun window-font-width &optional window face
3689 This function returns the average width in pixels for the font used by
3690 @var{face} in @var{window}. The specified @var{window} must be a live
3691 window. If @code{nil} or omitted, @var{window} defaults to the
3692 selected window, and @var{face} defaults to the default face in
3693 @var{window}.
3694 @end defun
3695
3696 @defun window-font-height &optional window face
3697 This function returns the height in pixels for the font used by
3698 @var{face} in @var{window}. The specified @var{window} must be a live
3699 window. If @code{nil} or omitted, @var{window} defaults to the
3700 selected window, and @var{face} defaults to the default face in
3701 @var{window}.
3702 @end defun
3703
3704 @node Fringes
3705 @section Fringes
3706 @cindex fringes
3707
3708 On graphical displays, Emacs draws @dfn{fringes} next to each
3709 window: thin vertical strips down the sides which can display bitmaps
3710 indicating truncation, continuation, horizontal scrolling, and so on.
3711
3712 @menu
3713 * Fringe Size/Pos:: Specifying where to put the window fringes.
3714 * Fringe Indicators:: Displaying indicator icons in the window fringes.
3715 * Fringe Cursors:: Displaying cursors in the right fringe.
3716 * Fringe Bitmaps:: Specifying bitmaps for fringe indicators.
3717 * Customizing Bitmaps:: Specifying your own bitmaps to use in the fringes.
3718 * Overlay Arrow:: Display of an arrow to indicate position.
3719 @end menu
3720
3721 @node Fringe Size/Pos
3722 @subsection Fringe Size and Position
3723
3724 The following buffer-local variables control the position and width
3725 of fringes in windows showing that buffer.
3726
3727 @defvar fringes-outside-margins
3728 The fringes normally appear between the display margins and the window
3729 text. If the value is non-@code{nil}, they appear outside the display
3730 margins. @xref{Display Margins}.
3731 @end defvar
3732
3733 @defvar left-fringe-width
3734 This variable, if non-@code{nil}, specifies the width of the left
3735 fringe in pixels. A value of @code{nil} means to use the left fringe
3736 width from the window's frame.
3737 @end defvar
3738
3739 @defvar right-fringe-width
3740 This variable, if non-@code{nil}, specifies the width of the right
3741 fringe in pixels. A value of @code{nil} means to use the right fringe
3742 width from the window's frame.
3743 @end defvar
3744
3745 Any buffer which does not specify values for these variables uses
3746 the values specified by the @code{left-fringe} and @code{right-fringe}
3747 frame parameters (@pxref{Layout Parameters}).
3748
3749 The above variables actually take effect via the function
3750 @code{set-window-buffer} (@pxref{Buffers and Windows}), which calls
3751 @code{set-window-fringes} as a subroutine. If you change one of these
3752 variables, the fringe display is not updated in existing windows
3753 showing the buffer, unless you call @code{set-window-buffer} again in
3754 each affected window. You can also use @code{set-window-fringes} to
3755 control the fringe display in individual windows.
3756
3757 @defun set-window-fringes window left &optional right outside-margins
3758 This function sets the fringe widths of window @var{window}.
3759 If @var{window} is @code{nil}, the selected window is used.
3760
3761 The argument @var{left} specifies the width in pixels of the left
3762 fringe, and likewise @var{right} for the right fringe. A value of
3763 @code{nil} for either one stands for the default width. If
3764 @var{outside-margins} is non-@code{nil}, that specifies that fringes
3765 should appear outside of the display margins.
3766 @end defun
3767
3768 @defun window-fringes &optional window
3769 This function returns information about the fringes of a window
3770 @var{window}. If @var{window} is omitted or @code{nil}, the selected
3771 window is used. The value has the form @code{(@var{left-width}
3772 @var{right-width} @var{outside-margins})}.
3773 @end defun
3774
3775
3776 @node Fringe Indicators
3777 @subsection Fringe Indicators
3778 @cindex fringe indicators
3779 @cindex indicators, fringe
3780
3781 @dfn{Fringe indicators} are tiny icons displayed in the window
3782 fringe to indicate truncated or continued lines, buffer boundaries,
3783 etc.
3784
3785 @defopt indicate-empty-lines
3786 @cindex fringes, and empty line indication
3787 @cindex empty lines, indicating
3788 When this is non-@code{nil}, Emacs displays a special glyph in the
3789 fringe of each empty line at the end of the buffer, on graphical
3790 displays. @xref{Fringes}. This variable is automatically
3791 buffer-local in every buffer.
3792 @end defopt
3793
3794 @defopt indicate-buffer-boundaries
3795 @cindex buffer boundaries, indicating
3796 This buffer-local variable controls how the buffer boundaries and
3797 window scrolling are indicated in the window fringes.
3798
3799 Emacs can indicate the buffer boundaries---that is, the first and last
3800 line in the buffer---with angle icons when they appear on the screen.
3801 In addition, Emacs can display an up-arrow in the fringe to show
3802 that there is text above the screen, and a down-arrow to show
3803 there is text below the screen.
3804
3805 There are three kinds of basic values:
3806
3807 @table @asis
3808 @item @code{nil}
3809 Don't display any of these fringe icons.
3810 @item @code{left}
3811 Display the angle icons and arrows in the left fringe.
3812 @item @code{right}
3813 Display the angle icons and arrows in the right fringe.
3814 @item any non-alist
3815 Display the angle icons in the left fringe
3816 and don't display the arrows.
3817 @end table
3818
3819 Otherwise the value should be an alist that specifies which fringe
3820 indicators to display and where. Each element of the alist should
3821 have the form @code{(@var{indicator} . @var{position})}. Here,
3822 @var{indicator} is one of @code{top}, @code{bottom}, @code{up},
3823 @code{down}, and @code{t} (which covers all the icons not yet
3824 specified), while @var{position} is one of @code{left}, @code{right}
3825 and @code{nil}.
3826
3827 For example, @code{((top . left) (t . right))} places the top angle
3828 bitmap in left fringe, and the bottom angle bitmap as well as both
3829 arrow bitmaps in right fringe. To show the angle bitmaps in the left
3830 fringe, and no arrow bitmaps, use @code{((top . left) (bottom . left))}.
3831 @end defopt
3832
3833 @defvar fringe-indicator-alist
3834 This buffer-local variable specifies the mapping from logical fringe
3835 indicators to the actual bitmaps displayed in the window fringes. The
3836 value is an alist of elements @code{(@var{indicator}
3837 . @var{bitmaps})}, where @var{indicator} specifies a logical indicator
3838 type and @var{bitmaps} specifies the fringe bitmaps to use for that
3839 indicator.
3840
3841 Each @var{indicator} should be one of the following symbols:
3842
3843 @table @asis
3844 @item @code{truncation}, @code{continuation}.
3845 Used for truncation and continuation lines.
3846
3847 @item @code{up}, @code{down}, @code{top}, @code{bottom}, @code{top-bottom}
3848 Used when @code{indicate-buffer-boundaries} is non-@code{nil}:
3849 @code{up} and @code{down} indicate a buffer boundary lying above or
3850 below the window edge; @code{top} and @code{bottom} indicate the
3851 topmost and bottommost buffer text line; and @code{top-bottom}
3852 indicates where there is just one line of text in the buffer.
3853
3854 @item @code{empty-line}
3855 Used to indicate empty lines when @code{indicate-empty-lines} is
3856 non-@code{nil}.
3857
3858 @item @code{overlay-arrow}
3859 Used for overlay arrows (@pxref{Overlay Arrow}).
3860 @c Is this used anywhere?
3861 @c @item Unknown bitmap indicator:
3862 @c @code{unknown}.
3863 @end table
3864
3865 Each @var{bitmaps} value may be a list of symbols @code{(@var{left}
3866 @var{right} [@var{left1} @var{right1}])}. The @var{left} and
3867 @var{right} symbols specify the bitmaps shown in the left and/or right
3868 fringe, for the specific indicator. @var{left1} and @var{right1} are
3869 specific to the @code{bottom} and @code{top-bottom} indicators, and
3870 are used to indicate that the last text line has no final newline.
3871 Alternatively, @var{bitmaps} may be a single symbol which is used in
3872 both left and right fringes.
3873
3874 @xref{Fringe Bitmaps}, for a list of standard bitmap symbols and how
3875 to define your own. In addition, @code{nil} represents the empty
3876 bitmap (i.e., an indicator that is not shown).
3877
3878 When @code{fringe-indicator-alist} has a buffer-local value, and
3879 there is no bitmap defined for a logical indicator, or the bitmap is
3880 @code{t}, the corresponding value from the default value of
3881 @code{fringe-indicator-alist} is used.
3882 @end defvar
3883
3884 @node Fringe Cursors
3885 @subsection Fringe Cursors
3886 @cindex fringe cursors
3887 @cindex cursor, fringe
3888
3889 When a line is exactly as wide as the window, Emacs displays the
3890 cursor in the right fringe instead of using two lines. Different
3891 bitmaps are used to represent the cursor in the fringe depending on
3892 the current buffer's cursor type.
3893
3894 @defopt overflow-newline-into-fringe
3895 If this is non-@code{nil}, lines exactly as wide as the window (not
3896 counting the final newline character) are not continued. Instead,
3897 when point is at the end of the line, the cursor appears in the right
3898 fringe.
3899 @end defopt
3900
3901 @defvar fringe-cursor-alist
3902 This variable specifies the mapping from logical cursor type to the
3903 actual fringe bitmaps displayed in the right fringe. The value is an
3904 alist where each element has the form @code{(@var{cursor-type}
3905 . @var{bitmap})}, which means to use the fringe bitmap @var{bitmap} to
3906 display cursors of type @var{cursor-type}.
3907
3908 Each @var{cursor-type} should be one of @code{box}, @code{hollow},
3909 @code{bar}, @code{hbar}, or @code{hollow-small}. The first four have
3910 the same meanings as in the @code{cursor-type} frame parameter
3911 (@pxref{Cursor Parameters}). The @code{hollow-small} type is used
3912 instead of @code{hollow} when the normal @code{hollow-rectangle}
3913 bitmap is too tall to fit on a specific display line.
3914
3915 Each @var{bitmap} should be a symbol specifying the fringe bitmap to
3916 be displayed for that logical cursor type.
3917 @iftex
3918 See the next subsection for details.
3919 @end iftex
3920 @ifnottex
3921 @xref{Fringe Bitmaps}.
3922 @end ifnottex
3923
3924 @c FIXME: I can't find the fringes-indicator-alist variable. Maybe
3925 @c it should be fringe-indicator-alist or fringe-cursor-alist? --xfq
3926 When @code{fringe-cursor-alist} has a buffer-local value, and there is
3927 no bitmap defined for a cursor type, the corresponding value from the
3928 default value of @code{fringes-indicator-alist} is used.
3929 @end defvar
3930
3931 @node Fringe Bitmaps
3932 @subsection Fringe Bitmaps
3933 @cindex fringe bitmaps
3934 @cindex bitmaps, fringe
3935
3936 The @dfn{fringe bitmaps} are the actual bitmaps which represent the
3937 logical fringe indicators for truncated or continued lines, buffer
3938 boundaries, overlay arrows, etc. Each bitmap is represented by a
3939 symbol.
3940 @iftex
3941 These symbols are referred to by the variables
3942 @code{fringe-indicator-alist} and @code{fringe-cursor-alist},
3943 described in the previous subsections.
3944 @end iftex
3945 @ifnottex
3946 These symbols are referred to by the variable
3947 @code{fringe-indicator-alist}, which maps fringe indicators to bitmaps
3948 (@pxref{Fringe Indicators}), and the variable
3949 @code{fringe-cursor-alist}, which maps fringe cursors to bitmaps
3950 (@pxref{Fringe Cursors}).
3951 @end ifnottex
3952
3953 Lisp programs can also directly display a bitmap in the left or
3954 right fringe, by using a @code{display} property for one of the
3955 characters appearing in the line (@pxref{Other Display Specs}). Such
3956 a display specification has the form
3957
3958 @example
3959 (@var{fringe} @var{bitmap} [@var{face}])
3960 @end example
3961
3962 @noindent
3963 @var{fringe} is either the symbol @code{left-fringe} or
3964 @code{right-fringe}. @var{bitmap} is a symbol identifying the bitmap
3965 to display. The optional @var{face} names a face whose foreground
3966 color is used to display the bitmap; this face is automatically merged
3967 with the @code{fringe} face.
3968
3969 Here is a list of the standard fringe bitmaps defined in Emacs, and
3970 how they are currently used in Emacs (via
3971 @code{fringe-indicator-alist} and @code{fringe-cursor-alist}):
3972
3973 @table @asis
3974 @item @code{left-arrow}, @code{right-arrow}
3975 Used to indicate truncated lines.
3976
3977 @item @code{left-curly-arrow}, @code{right-curly-arrow}
3978 Used to indicate continued lines.
3979
3980 @item @code{right-triangle}, @code{left-triangle}
3981 The former is used by overlay arrows. The latter is unused.
3982
3983 @item @code{up-arrow}, @code{down-arrow}, @code{top-left-angle} @code{top-right-angle}
3984 @itemx @code{bottom-left-angle}, @code{bottom-right-angle}
3985 @itemx @code{top-right-angle}, @code{top-left-angle}
3986 @itemx @code{left-bracket}, @code{right-bracket}, @code{top-right-angle}, @code{top-left-angle}
3987 Used to indicate buffer boundaries.
3988
3989 @item @code{filled-rectangle}, @code{hollow-rectangle}
3990 @itemx @code{filled-square}, @code{hollow-square}
3991 @itemx @code{vertical-bar}, @code{horizontal-bar}
3992 Used for different types of fringe cursors.
3993
3994 @item @code{empty-line}, @code{exclamation-mark}, @code{question-mark}, @code{exclamation-mark}
3995 Not used by core Emacs features.
3996 @end table
3997
3998 @noindent
3999 The next subsection describes how to define your own fringe bitmaps.
4000
4001 @defun fringe-bitmaps-at-pos &optional pos window
4002 This function returns the fringe bitmaps of the display line
4003 containing position @var{pos} in window @var{window}. The return
4004 value has the form @code{(@var{left} @var{right} @var{ov})}, where @var{left}
4005 is the symbol for the fringe bitmap in the left fringe (or @code{nil}
4006 if no bitmap), @var{right} is similar for the right fringe, and @var{ov}
4007 is non-@code{nil} if there is an overlay arrow in the left fringe.
4008
4009 The value is @code{nil} if @var{pos} is not visible in @var{window}.
4010 If @var{window} is @code{nil}, that stands for the selected window.
4011 If @var{pos} is @code{nil}, that stands for the value of point in
4012 @var{window}.
4013 @end defun
4014
4015 @node Customizing Bitmaps
4016 @subsection Customizing Fringe Bitmaps
4017 @cindex fringe bitmaps, customizing
4018
4019 @defun define-fringe-bitmap bitmap bits &optional height width align
4020 This function defines the symbol @var{bitmap} as a new fringe bitmap,
4021 or replaces an existing bitmap with that name.
4022
4023 The argument @var{bits} specifies the image to use. It should be
4024 either a string or a vector of integers, where each element (an
4025 integer) corresponds to one row of the bitmap. Each bit of an integer
4026 corresponds to one pixel of the bitmap, where the low bit corresponds
4027 to the rightmost pixel of the bitmap.
4028
4029 The height is normally the length of @var{bits}. However, you
4030 can specify a different height with non-@code{nil} @var{height}. The width
4031 is normally 8, but you can specify a different width with non-@code{nil}
4032 @var{width}. The width must be an integer between 1 and 16.
4033
4034 The argument @var{align} specifies the positioning of the bitmap
4035 relative to the range of rows where it is used; the default is to
4036 center the bitmap. The allowed values are @code{top}, @code{center},
4037 or @code{bottom}.
4038
4039 The @var{align} argument may also be a list @code{(@var{align}
4040 @var{periodic})} where @var{align} is interpreted as described above.
4041 If @var{periodic} is non-@code{nil}, it specifies that the rows in
4042 @code{bits} should be repeated enough times to reach the specified
4043 height.
4044 @end defun
4045
4046 @defun destroy-fringe-bitmap bitmap
4047 This function destroy the fringe bitmap identified by @var{bitmap}.
4048 If @var{bitmap} identifies a standard fringe bitmap, it actually
4049 restores the standard definition of that bitmap, instead of
4050 eliminating it entirely.
4051 @end defun
4052
4053 @defun set-fringe-bitmap-face bitmap &optional face
4054 This sets the face for the fringe bitmap @var{bitmap} to @var{face}.
4055 If @var{face} is @code{nil}, it selects the @code{fringe} face. The
4056 bitmap's face controls the color to draw it in.
4057
4058 @var{face} is merged with the @code{fringe} face, so normally
4059 @var{face} should specify only the foreground color.
4060 @end defun
4061
4062 @node Overlay Arrow
4063 @subsection The Overlay Arrow
4064 @c @cindex overlay arrow Duplicates variable names
4065
4066 The @dfn{overlay arrow} is useful for directing the user's attention
4067 to a particular line in a buffer. For example, in the modes used for
4068 interface to debuggers, the overlay arrow indicates the line of code
4069 about to be executed. This feature has nothing to do with
4070 @dfn{overlays} (@pxref{Overlays}).
4071
4072 @defvar overlay-arrow-string
4073 This variable holds the string to display to call attention to a
4074 particular line, or @code{nil} if the arrow feature is not in use.
4075 On a graphical display the contents of the string are ignored; instead a
4076 glyph is displayed in the fringe area to the left of the display area.
4077 @end defvar
4078
4079 @defvar overlay-arrow-position
4080 This variable holds a marker that indicates where to display the overlay
4081 arrow. It should point at the beginning of a line. On a non-graphical
4082 display the arrow text
4083 appears at the beginning of that line, overlaying any text that would
4084 otherwise appear. Since the arrow is usually short, and the line
4085 usually begins with indentation, normally nothing significant is
4086 overwritten.
4087
4088 The overlay-arrow string is displayed in any given buffer if the value
4089 of @code{overlay-arrow-position} in that buffer points into that
4090 buffer. Thus, it is possible to display multiple overlay arrow strings
4091 by creating buffer-local bindings of @code{overlay-arrow-position}.
4092 However, it is usually cleaner to use
4093 @code{overlay-arrow-variable-list} to achieve this result.
4094 @c !!! overlay-arrow-position: but the overlay string may remain in the display
4095 @c of some other buffer until an update is required. This should be fixed
4096 @c now. Is it?
4097 @end defvar
4098
4099 You can do a similar job by creating an overlay with a
4100 @code{before-string} property. @xref{Overlay Properties}.
4101
4102 You can define multiple overlay arrows via the variable
4103 @code{overlay-arrow-variable-list}.
4104
4105 @defvar overlay-arrow-variable-list
4106 This variable's value is a list of variables, each of which specifies
4107 the position of an overlay arrow. The variable
4108 @code{overlay-arrow-position} has its normal meaning because it is on
4109 this list.
4110 @end defvar
4111
4112 Each variable on this list can have properties
4113 @code{overlay-arrow-string} and @code{overlay-arrow-bitmap} that
4114 specify an overlay arrow string (for text terminals) or fringe bitmap
4115 (for graphical terminals) to display at the corresponding overlay
4116 arrow position. If either property is not set, the default
4117 @code{overlay-arrow-string} or @code{overlay-arrow} fringe indicator
4118 is used.
4119
4120
4121 @node Scroll Bars
4122 @section Scroll Bars
4123 @cindex scroll bars
4124
4125 Normally the frame parameter @code{vertical-scroll-bars} controls
4126 whether the windows in the frame have vertical scroll bars, and whether
4127 they are on the left or right. The frame parameter
4128 @code{scroll-bar-width} specifies how wide they are (@code{nil} meaning
4129 the default).
4130
4131 The frame parameter @code{horizontal-scroll-bars} controls whether
4132 the windows in the frame have horizontal scroll bars. The frame
4133 parameter @code{scroll-bar-height} specifies how high they are
4134 (@code{nil} meaning the default). @xref{Layout Parameters}.
4135
4136 @vindex horizontal-scroll-bars-available-p
4137 Horizontal scroll bars are not available on all platforms. The
4138 function @code{horizontal-scroll-bars-available-p} which takes no
4139 argument returns non-@code{nil} if they are available on your system.
4140
4141 The following three functions take as argument a live frame which
4142 defaults to the selected one.
4143
4144 @defun frame-current-scroll-bars &optional frame
4145 This function reports the scroll bar types for frame @var{frame}. The
4146 value is a cons cell @code{(@var{vertical-type} .@:
4147 @var{horizontal-type})}, where @var{vertical-type} is either
4148 @code{left}, @code{right}, or @code{nil} (which means no vertical scroll
4149 bar.) @var{horizontal-type} is either @code{bottom} or @code{nil}
4150 (which means no horizontal scroll bar).
4151 @end defun
4152
4153 @defun frame-scroll-bar-width &optional Lisp_Object &optional frame
4154 This function returns the width of vertical scroll bars of @var{frame}
4155 in pixels.
4156 @end defun
4157
4158 @defun frame-scroll-bar-height &optional Lisp_Object &optional frame
4159 This function returns the height of horizontal scroll bars of
4160 @var{frame} in pixels.
4161 @end defun
4162
4163 You can override the frame specific settings for individual windows by
4164 using the following function:
4165
4166 @defun set-window-scroll-bars window &optional width vertical-type height horizontal-type
4167 This function sets the width and/or height and the types of scroll bars
4168 for window @var{window}.
4169
4170 @var{width} specifies the width of the vertical scroll bar in pixels
4171 (@code{nil} means use the width specified for the frame).
4172 @var{vertical-type} specifies whether to have a vertical scroll bar and,
4173 if so, where. The possible values are @code{left}, @code{right},
4174 @code{t}, which means to use the frame's default, and @code{nil} for no
4175 vertical scroll bar.
4176
4177 @var{height} specifies the height of the horizontal scroll bar in pixels
4178 (@code{nil} means use the height specified for the frame).
4179 @var{horizontal-type} specifies whether to have a horizontal scroll bar.
4180 The possible values are @code{bottom}, @code{t}, which means to use the
4181 frame's default, and @code{nil} for no horizontal scroll bar.
4182
4183 If @var{window} is @code{nil}, the selected window is used.
4184 @end defun
4185
4186 The following four functions take as argument a live window which
4187 defaults to the selected one.
4188
4189 @defun window-scroll-bars &optional window
4190 This function returns a list of the form @code{(@var{width}
4191 @var{columns} @var{vertical-type} @var{height} @var{lines}
4192 @var{horizontal-type})}.
4193
4194 The value @var{width} is the value that was specified for the width of
4195 the vertical scroll bar (which may be @code{nil}); @var{columns} is the
4196 (possibly rounded) number of columns that the vertical scroll bar
4197 actually occupies.
4198
4199 The value @var{height} is the value that was specified for the height of
4200 the horizontal scroll bar (which may be @code{nil}); @var{lines} is the
4201 (possibly rounded) number of lines that the horizontally scroll bar
4202 actually occupies.
4203 @end defun
4204
4205 @defun window-current-scroll-bars &optional window
4206 This function reports the scroll bar type for window @var{window}. The
4207 value is a cons cell @code{(@var{vertical-type} .@:
4208 @var{horizontal-type})}. Unlike @code{window-scroll-bars}, this reports
4209 the scroll bar type actually used, once frame defaults and
4210 @code{scroll-bar-mode} are taken into account.
4211 @end defun
4212
4213 @defun window-scroll-bar-width &optional window
4214 This function returns the width in pixels of @var{window}'s vertical
4215 scrollbar.
4216 @end defun
4217
4218 @defun window-scroll-bar-height &optional window
4219 This function returns the height in pixels of @var{window}'s horizontal
4220 scrollbar.
4221 @end defun
4222
4223 If you don't specify these values for a window with
4224 @code{set-window-scroll-bars}, the buffer-local variables
4225 @code{vertical-scroll-bar}, @code{horizontal-scroll-bar},
4226 @code{scroll-bar-width} and @code{scroll-bar-height} in the buffer being
4227 displayed control the window's scroll bars. The function
4228 @code{set-window-buffer} examines these variables. If you change them
4229 in a buffer that is already visible in a window, you can make the window
4230 take note of the new values by calling @code{set-window-buffer}
4231 specifying the same buffer that is already displayed.
4232
4233 You can control the appearance of scroll bars for a particular buffer by
4234 setting the following variables which automatically become buffer-local
4235 when set.
4236
4237 @defvar vertical-scroll-bar
4238 This variable specifies the location of the vertical scroll bar. The
4239 possible values are @code{left}, @code{right}, @code{t}, which means to
4240 use the frame's default, and @code{nil} for no scroll bar.
4241 @end defvar
4242
4243 @defvar horizontal-scroll-bar
4244 This variable specifies the location of the horizontal scroll bar. The
4245 possible values are @code{bottom}, @code{t}, which means to use the
4246 frame's default, and @code{nil} for no scroll bar.
4247 @end defvar
4248
4249 @defvar scroll-bar-width
4250 This variable specifies the width of the buffer's vertical scroll bars,
4251 measured in pixels. A value of @code{nil} means to use the value
4252 specified by the frame.
4253 @end defvar
4254
4255 @defvar scroll-bar-height
4256 This variable specifies the height of the buffer's horizontal scroll
4257 bar, measured in pixels. A value of @code{nil} means to use the value
4258 specified by the frame.
4259 @end defvar
4260
4261 Finally you can toggle the display of scroll bars on all frames by
4262 customizing the variables @code{scroll-bar-mode} and
4263 @code{horizontal-scroll-bar-mode}.
4264
4265 @defopt scroll-bar-mode
4266 This variable controls whether and where to put vertical scroll bars in
4267 all frames. The possible values are @code{nil} for no scroll bars,
4268 @code{left} to put scroll bars on the left and @code{right} to put
4269 scroll bars on the right.
4270 @end defopt
4271
4272 @defopt horizontal-scroll-bar-mode
4273 This variable controls whether to display horizontal scroll bars on all
4274 frames.
4275 @end defopt
4276
4277
4278 @node Window Dividers
4279 @section Window Dividers
4280 @cindex window dividers
4281 @cindex right dividers
4282 @cindex bottom dividers
4283
4284 Window dividers are bars drawn between a frame's windows. A right
4285 divider is drawn between a window and any adjacent windows on the right.
4286 Its width (thickness) is specified by the frame parameter
4287 @code{right-divider-width}. A bottom divider is drawn between a
4288 window and adjacent windows on the bottom or the echo area. Its width
4289 is specified by the frame parameter @code{bottom-divider-width}. In
4290 either case, specifying a width of zero means to not draw such dividers.
4291 @xref{Layout Parameters}.
4292
4293 Technically, a right divider belongs to the window on its left,
4294 which means that its width contributes to the total width of that
4295 window. A bottom divider belongs to the window above it, which
4296 means that its width contributes to the total height of that window.
4297 @xref{Window Sizes}. When a window has both, a right and a bottom
4298 divider, the bottom divider prevails. This means that a bottom
4299 divider is drawn over the full total width of its window while the right
4300 divider ends above the bottom divider.
4301
4302 Dividers can be dragged with the mouse and are therefore useful for
4303 adjusting the sizes of adjacent windows with the mouse. They also serve
4304 to visually set apart adjacent windows when no scroll bars or mode lines
4305 are present. The following three faces allow to customize the
4306 appearance of dividers:
4307
4308 @table @code
4309 @item window-divider
4310 When a divider is less than three pixels wide, it is drawn solidly with
4311 the foreground of this face. For larger dividers this face is used for
4312 the inner part only, excluding the first and last pixel.
4313
4314 @item window-divider-first-pixel
4315 This is the face used for drawing the first pixel of a divider that is
4316 at least three pixels wide. To obtain a solid appearance, set this to
4317 the same value used for the @code{window-divider} face.
4318
4319 @item window-divider-last-pixel
4320 This is the face used for drawing the last pixel of a divider that is at
4321 least three pixels wide. To obtain a solid appearance, set this to the
4322 same value used for the @code{window-divider} face.
4323 @end table
4324
4325 You can get the sizes of the dividers of a specific window with the
4326 following two functions.
4327
4328 @defun window-right-divider-width &optional window
4329 Return the width (thickness) in pixels of @var{window}'s right divider.
4330 @var{window} must be a live window and defaults to the selected one.
4331 The return value is always zero for a rightmost window.
4332 @end defun
4333
4334 @defun window-bottom-divider-width &optional window
4335 Return the width (thickness) in pixels of @var{window}'s bottom divider.
4336 @var{window} must be a live window and defaults to the selected one.
4337 The return value is zero for the minibuffer window or a bottommost
4338 window on a minibuffer-less frame.
4339 @end defun
4340
4341
4342 @node Display Property
4343 @section The @code{display} Property
4344 @cindex display specification
4345 @kindex display @r{(text property)}
4346
4347 The @code{display} text property (or overlay property) is used to
4348 insert images into text, and to control other aspects of how text
4349 displays. The value of the @code{display} property should be a
4350 display specification, or a list or vector containing several display
4351 specifications. Display specifications in the same @code{display}
4352 property value generally apply in parallel to the text they cover.
4353
4354 If several sources (overlays and/or a text property) specify values
4355 for the @code{display} property, only one of the values takes effect,
4356 following the rules of @code{get-char-property}. @xref{Examining
4357 Properties}.
4358
4359 The rest of this section describes several kinds of
4360 display specifications and what they mean.
4361
4362 @menu
4363 * Replacing Specs:: Display specs that replace the text.
4364 * Specified Space:: Displaying one space with a specified width.
4365 * Pixel Specification:: Specifying space width or height in pixels.
4366 * Other Display Specs:: Displaying an image; adjusting the height,
4367 spacing, and other properties of text.
4368 * Display Margins:: Displaying text or images to the side of the main text.
4369 @end menu
4370
4371 @node Replacing Specs
4372 @subsection Display Specs That Replace The Text
4373 @cindex replacing display specs
4374
4375 Some kinds of display specifications specify something to display
4376 instead of the text that has the property. These are called
4377 @dfn{replacing} display specifications. Emacs does not allow the user
4378 to interactively move point into the middle of buffer text that is
4379 replaced in this way.
4380
4381 If a list of display specifications includes more than one replacing
4382 display specification, the first overrides the rest. Replacing
4383 display specifications make most other display specifications
4384 irrelevant, since those don't apply to the replacement.
4385
4386 For replacing display specifications, @dfn{the text that has the
4387 property} means all the consecutive characters that have the same
4388 Lisp object as their @code{display} property; these characters are
4389 replaced as a single unit. If two characters have different Lisp
4390 objects as their @code{display} properties (i.e., objects which are
4391 not @code{eq}), they are handled separately.
4392
4393 Here is an example which illustrates this point. A string serves as
4394 a replacing display specification, which replaces the text that has
4395 the property with the specified string (@pxref{Other Display Specs}).
4396 Consider the following function:
4397
4398 @smallexample
4399 (defun foo ()
4400 (dotimes (i 5)
4401 (let ((string (concat "A"))
4402 (start (+ i i (point-min))))
4403 (put-text-property start (1+ start) 'display string)
4404 (put-text-property start (+ 2 start) 'display string))))
4405 @end smallexample
4406
4407 @noindent
4408 This function gives each of the first ten characters in the buffer a
4409 @code{display} property which is a string @code{"A"}, but they don't
4410 all get the same string object. The first two characters get the same
4411 string object, so they are replaced with one @samp{A}; the fact that
4412 the display property was assigned in two separate calls to
4413 @code{put-text-property} is irrelevant. Similarly, the next two
4414 characters get a second string (@code{concat} creates a new string
4415 object), so they are replaced with one @samp{A}; and so on. Thus, the
4416 ten characters appear as five A's.
4417
4418 @node Specified Space
4419 @subsection Specified Spaces
4420 @cindex spaces, specified height or width
4421 @cindex variable-width spaces
4422
4423 To display a space of specified width and/or height, use a display
4424 specification of the form @code{(space . @var{props})}, where
4425 @var{props} is a property list (a list of alternating properties and
4426 values). You can put this property on one or more consecutive
4427 characters; a space of the specified height and width is displayed in
4428 place of @emph{all} of those characters. These are the properties you
4429 can use in @var{props} to specify the weight of the space:
4430
4431 @table @code
4432 @item :width @var{width}
4433 If @var{width} is a number, it specifies
4434 that the space width should be @var{width} times the normal character
4435 width. @var{width} can also be a @dfn{pixel width} specification
4436 (@pxref{Pixel Specification}).
4437
4438 @item :relative-width @var{factor}
4439 Specifies that the width of the stretch should be computed from the
4440 first character in the group of consecutive characters that have the
4441 same @code{display} property. The space width is the pixel width of
4442 that character, multiplied by @var{factor}. (On text-mode terminals,
4443 the ``pixel width'' of a character is usually 1, but it could be more
4444 for TABs and double-width CJK characters.)
4445
4446 @item :align-to @var{hpos}
4447 Specifies that the space should be wide enough to reach @var{hpos}.
4448 If @var{hpos} is a number, it is measured in units of the normal
4449 character width. @var{hpos} can also be a @dfn{pixel width}
4450 specification (@pxref{Pixel Specification}).
4451 @end table
4452
4453 You should use one and only one of the above properties. You can
4454 also specify the height of the space, with these properties:
4455
4456 @table @code
4457 @item :height @var{height}
4458 Specifies the height of the space.
4459 If @var{height} is a number, it specifies
4460 that the space height should be @var{height} times the normal character
4461 height. The @var{height} may also be a @dfn{pixel height} specification
4462 (@pxref{Pixel Specification}).
4463
4464 @item :relative-height @var{factor}
4465 Specifies the height of the space, multiplying the ordinary height
4466 of the text having this display specification by @var{factor}.
4467
4468 @item :ascent @var{ascent}
4469 If the value of @var{ascent} is a non-negative number no greater than
4470 100, it specifies that @var{ascent} percent of the height of the space
4471 should be considered as the ascent of the space---that is, the part
4472 above the baseline. The ascent may also be specified in pixel units
4473 with a @dfn{pixel ascent} specification (@pxref{Pixel Specification}).
4474
4475 @end table
4476
4477 Don't use both @code{:height} and @code{:relative-height} together.
4478
4479 The @code{:width} and @code{:align-to} properties are supported on
4480 non-graphic terminals, but the other space properties in this section
4481 are not.
4482
4483 Note that space properties are treated as paragraph separators for
4484 the purposes of reordering bidirectional text for display.
4485 @xref{Bidirectional Display}, for the details.
4486
4487 @node Pixel Specification
4488 @subsection Pixel Specification for Spaces
4489 @cindex spaces, pixel specification
4490
4491 The value of the @code{:width}, @code{:align-to}, @code{:height},
4492 and @code{:ascent} properties can be a special kind of expression that
4493 is evaluated during redisplay. The result of the evaluation is used
4494 as an absolute number of pixels.
4495
4496 The following expressions are supported:
4497
4498 @smallexample
4499 @group
4500 @var{expr} ::= @var{num} | (@var{num}) | @var{unit} | @var{elem} | @var{pos} | @var{image} | @var{form}
4501 @var{num} ::= @var{integer} | @var{float} | @var{symbol}
4502 @var{unit} ::= in | mm | cm | width | height
4503 @end group
4504 @group
4505 @var{elem} ::= left-fringe | right-fringe | left-margin | right-margin
4506 | scroll-bar | text
4507 @var{pos} ::= left | center | right
4508 @var{form} ::= (@var{num} . @var{expr}) | (@var{op} @var{expr} ...)
4509 @var{op} ::= + | -
4510 @end group
4511 @end smallexample
4512
4513 The form @var{num} specifies a fraction of the default frame font
4514 height or width. The form @code{(@var{num})} specifies an absolute
4515 number of pixels. If @var{num} is a symbol, @var{symbol}, its
4516 buffer-local variable binding is used.
4517
4518 The @code{in}, @code{mm}, and @code{cm} units specify the number of
4519 pixels per inch, millimeter, and centimeter, respectively. The
4520 @code{width} and @code{height} units correspond to the default width
4521 and height of the current face. An image specification @code{image}
4522 corresponds to the width or height of the image.
4523
4524 The elements @code{left-fringe}, @code{right-fringe},
4525 @code{left-margin}, @code{right-margin}, @code{scroll-bar}, and
4526 @code{text} specify to the width of the corresponding area of the
4527 window.
4528
4529 The @code{left}, @code{center}, and @code{right} positions can be
4530 used with @code{:align-to} to specify a position relative to the left
4531 edge, center, or right edge of the text area.
4532
4533 Any of the above window elements (except @code{text}) can also be
4534 used with @code{:align-to} to specify that the position is relative to
4535 the left edge of the given area. Once the base offset for a relative
4536 position has been set (by the first occurrence of one of these
4537 symbols), further occurrences of these symbols are interpreted as the
4538 width of the specified area. For example, to align to the center of
4539 the left-margin, use
4540
4541 @example
4542 :align-to (+ left-margin (0.5 . left-margin))
4543 @end example
4544
4545 If no specific base offset is set for alignment, it is always relative
4546 to the left edge of the text area. For example, @samp{:align-to 0} in a
4547 header-line aligns with the first text column in the text area.
4548
4549 A value of the form @code{(@var{num} . @var{expr})} stands for the
4550 product of the values of @var{num} and @var{expr}. For example,
4551 @code{(2 . in)} specifies a width of 2 inches, while @code{(0.5 .
4552 @var{image})} specifies half the width (or height) of the specified
4553 image.
4554
4555 The form @code{(+ @var{expr} ...)} adds up the value of the
4556 expressions. The form @code{(- @var{expr} ...)} negates or subtracts
4557 the value of the expressions.
4558
4559 @node Other Display Specs
4560 @subsection Other Display Specifications
4561
4562 Here are the other sorts of display specifications that you can use
4563 in the @code{display} text property.
4564
4565 @table @code
4566 @item @var{string}
4567 Display @var{string} instead of the text that has this property.
4568
4569 Recursive display specifications are not supported---@var{string}'s
4570 @code{display} properties, if any, are not used.
4571
4572 @item (image . @var{image-props})
4573 This kind of display specification is an image descriptor (@pxref{Images}).
4574 When used as a display specification, it means to display the image
4575 instead of the text that has the display specification.
4576
4577 @item (slice @var{x} @var{y} @var{width} @var{height})
4578 This specification together with @code{image} specifies a @dfn{slice}
4579 (a partial area) of the image to display. The elements @var{y} and
4580 @var{x} specify the top left corner of the slice, within the image;
4581 @var{width} and @var{height} specify the width and height of the
4582 slice. Integers are numbers of pixels. A floating-point number
4583 in the range 0.0--1.0 stands for that fraction of the width or height
4584 of the entire image.
4585
4586 @item ((margin nil) @var{string})
4587 A display specification of this form means to display @var{string}
4588 instead of the text that has the display specification, at the same
4589 position as that text. It is equivalent to using just @var{string},
4590 but it is done as a special case of marginal display (@pxref{Display
4591 Margins}).
4592
4593 @item (left-fringe @var{bitmap} @r{[}@var{face}@r{]})
4594 @itemx (right-fringe @var{bitmap} @r{[}@var{face}@r{]})
4595 This display specification on any character of a line of text causes
4596 the specified @var{bitmap} be displayed in the left or right fringes
4597 for that line, instead of the characters that have the display
4598 specification. The optional @var{face} specifies the colors to be
4599 used for the bitmap. @xref{Fringe Bitmaps}, for the details.
4600
4601 @item (space-width @var{factor})
4602 This display specification affects all the space characters within the
4603 text that has the specification. It displays all of these spaces
4604 @var{factor} times as wide as normal. The element @var{factor} should
4605 be an integer or float. Characters other than spaces are not affected
4606 at all; in particular, this has no effect on tab characters.
4607
4608 @item (height @var{height})
4609 This display specification makes the text taller or shorter.
4610 Here are the possibilities for @var{height}:
4611
4612 @table @asis
4613 @item @code{(+ @var{n})}
4614 @c FIXME: Add an index for "step"? --xfq
4615 This means to use a font that is @var{n} steps larger. A @dfn{step} is
4616 defined by the set of available fonts---specifically, those that match
4617 what was otherwise specified for this text, in all attributes except
4618 height. Each size for which a suitable font is available counts as
4619 another step. @var{n} should be an integer.
4620
4621 @item @code{(- @var{n})}
4622 This means to use a font that is @var{n} steps smaller.
4623
4624 @item a number, @var{factor}
4625 A number, @var{factor}, means to use a font that is @var{factor} times
4626 as tall as the default font.
4627
4628 @item a symbol, @var{function}
4629 A symbol is a function to compute the height. It is called with the
4630 current height as argument, and should return the new height to use.
4631
4632 @item anything else, @var{form}
4633 If the @var{height} value doesn't fit the previous possibilities, it is
4634 a form. Emacs evaluates it to get the new height, with the symbol
4635 @code{height} bound to the current specified font height.
4636 @end table
4637
4638 @item (raise @var{factor})
4639 This kind of display specification raises or lowers the text
4640 it applies to, relative to the baseline of the line.
4641
4642 @var{factor} must be a number, which is interpreted as a multiple of the
4643 height of the affected text. If it is positive, that means to display
4644 the characters raised. If it is negative, that means to display them
4645 lower down.
4646
4647 If the text also has a @code{height} display specification, that does
4648 not affect the amount of raising or lowering, which is based on the
4649 faces used for the text.
4650 @end table
4651
4652 @c We put all the '@code{(when ...)}' on one line to encourage
4653 @c makeinfo's end-of-sentence heuristics to DTRT. Previously, the dot
4654 @c was at eol; the info file ended up w/ two spaces rendered after it.
4655 You can make any display specification conditional. To do that,
4656 package it in another list of the form
4657 @code{(when @var{condition} . @var{spec})}.
4658 Then the specification @var{spec} applies only when
4659 @var{condition} evaluates to a non-@code{nil} value. During the
4660 evaluation, @code{object} is bound to the string or buffer having the
4661 conditional @code{display} property. @code{position} and
4662 @code{buffer-position} are bound to the position within @code{object}
4663 and the buffer position where the @code{display} property was found,
4664 respectively. Both positions can be different when @code{object} is a
4665 string.
4666
4667 @node Display Margins
4668 @subsection Displaying in the Margins
4669 @cindex display margins
4670 @cindex margins, display
4671
4672 A buffer can have blank areas called @dfn{display margins} on the
4673 left and on the right. Ordinary text never appears in these areas,
4674 but you can put things into the display margins using the
4675 @code{display} property. There is currently no way to make text or
4676 images in the margin mouse-sensitive.
4677
4678 The way to display something in the margins is to specify it in a
4679 margin display specification in the @code{display} property of some
4680 text. This is a replacing display specification, meaning that the
4681 text you put it on does not get displayed; the margin display appears,
4682 but that text does not.
4683
4684 A margin display specification looks like @code{((margin
4685 right-margin) @var{spec})} or @code{((margin left-margin) @var{spec})}.
4686 Here, @var{spec} is another display specification that says what to
4687 display in the margin. Typically it is a string of text to display,
4688 or an image descriptor.
4689
4690 To display something in the margin @emph{in association with}
4691 certain buffer text, without altering or preventing the display of
4692 that text, put a @code{before-string} property on the text and put the
4693 margin display specification on the contents of the before-string.
4694
4695 Before the display margins can display anything, you must give
4696 them a nonzero width. The usual way to do that is to set these
4697 variables:
4698
4699 @defvar left-margin-width
4700 This variable specifies the width of the left margin, in character
4701 cell (a.k.a.@: ``column'') units. It is buffer-local in all buffers.
4702 A value of @code{nil} means no left marginal area.
4703 @end defvar
4704
4705 @defvar right-margin-width
4706 This variable specifies the width of the right margin, in character
4707 cell units. It is buffer-local in all buffers. A value of @code{nil}
4708 means no right marginal area.
4709 @end defvar
4710
4711 Setting these variables does not immediately affect the window. These
4712 variables are checked when a new buffer is displayed in the window.
4713 Thus, you can make changes take effect by calling
4714 @code{set-window-buffer}.
4715
4716 You can also set the margin widths immediately.
4717
4718 @defun set-window-margins window left &optional right
4719 This function specifies the margin widths for window @var{window}, in
4720 character cell units. The argument @var{left} controls the left
4721 margin, and @var{right} controls the right margin (default @code{0}).
4722 @end defun
4723
4724 @defun window-margins &optional window
4725 This function returns the width of the left and right margins of
4726 @var{window} as a cons cell of the form @w{@code{(@var{left}
4727 . @var{right})}}. If one of the two marginal areas does not exist,
4728 its width is returned as @code{nil}; if neither of the two margins exist,
4729 the function returns @code{(nil)}. If @var{window} is @code{nil}, the
4730 selected window is used.
4731 @end defun
4732
4733 @node Images
4734 @section Images
4735 @cindex images in buffers
4736
4737 To display an image in an Emacs buffer, you must first create an image
4738 descriptor, then use it as a display specifier in the @code{display}
4739 property of text that is displayed (@pxref{Display Property}).
4740
4741 Emacs is usually able to display images when it is run on a
4742 graphical terminal. Images cannot be displayed in a text terminal, on
4743 certain graphical terminals that lack the support for this, or if
4744 Emacs is compiled without image support. You can use the function
4745 @code{display-images-p} to determine if images can in principle be
4746 displayed (@pxref{Display Feature Testing}).
4747
4748 @menu
4749 * Image Formats:: Supported image formats.
4750 * Image Descriptors:: How to specify an image for use in @code{:display}.
4751 * XBM Images:: Special features for XBM format.
4752 * XPM Images:: Special features for XPM format.
4753 * PostScript Images:: Special features for PostScript format.
4754 * ImageMagick Images:: Special features available through ImageMagick.
4755 * Other Image Types:: Various other formats are supported.
4756 * Defining Images:: Convenient ways to define an image for later use.
4757 * Showing Images:: Convenient ways to display an image once it is defined.
4758 * Multi-Frame Images:: Some images contain more than one frame.
4759 * Image Cache:: Internal mechanisms of image display.
4760 @end menu
4761
4762 @node Image Formats
4763 @subsection Image Formats
4764 @cindex image formats
4765 @cindex image types
4766
4767 Emacs can display a number of different image formats. Some of
4768 these image formats are supported only if particular support libraries
4769 are installed. On some platforms, Emacs can load support libraries on
4770 demand; if so, the variable @code{dynamic-library-alist} can be used
4771 to modify the set of known names for these dynamic libraries.
4772 @xref{Dynamic Libraries}.
4773
4774 Supported image formats (and the required support libraries) include
4775 PBM and XBM (which do not depend on support libraries and are always
4776 available), XPM (@code{libXpm}), GIF (@code{libgif} or
4777 @code{libungif}), PostScript (@code{gs}), JPEG (@code{libjpeg}), TIFF
4778 (@code{libtiff}), PNG (@code{libpng}), and SVG (@code{librsvg}).
4779
4780 Each of these image formats is associated with an @dfn{image type
4781 symbol}. The symbols for the above formats are, respectively,
4782 @code{pbm}, @code{xbm}, @code{xpm}, @code{gif}, @code{postscript},
4783 @code{jpeg}, @code{tiff}, @code{png}, and @code{svg}.
4784
4785 Furthermore, if you build Emacs with ImageMagick
4786 (@code{libMagickWand}) support, Emacs can display any image format
4787 that ImageMagick can. @xref{ImageMagick Images}. All images
4788 displayed via ImageMagick have type symbol @code{imagemagick}.
4789
4790 @defvar image-types
4791 This variable contains a list of type symbols for image formats which
4792 are potentially supported in the current configuration.
4793
4794 ``Potentially'' means that Emacs knows about the image types, not
4795 necessarily that they can be used (for example, they could depend on
4796 unavailable dynamic libraries). To know which image types are really
4797 available, use @code{image-type-available-p}.
4798 @end defvar
4799
4800 @defun image-type-available-p type
4801 This function returns non-@code{nil} if images of type @var{type} can
4802 be loaded and displayed. @var{type} must be an image type symbol.
4803
4804 For image types whose support libraries are statically linked, this
4805 function always returns @code{t}. For image types whose support
4806 libraries are dynamically loaded, it returns @code{t} if the library
4807 could be loaded and @code{nil} otherwise.
4808 @end defun
4809
4810 @node Image Descriptors
4811 @subsection Image Descriptors
4812 @cindex image descriptor
4813
4814 An @dfn{image descriptor} is a list which specifies the underlying
4815 data for an image, and how to display it. It is typically used as the
4816 value of a @code{display} overlay or text property (@pxref{Other
4817 Display Specs}); but @xref{Showing Images}, for convenient helper
4818 functions to insert images into buffers.
4819
4820 Each image descriptor has the form @code{(image . @var{props})},
4821 where @var{props} is a property list of alternating keyword symbols
4822 and values, including at least the pair @code{:type @var{type}} that
4823 specifies the image type.
4824
4825 The following is a list of properties that are meaningful for all
4826 image types (there are also properties which are meaningful only for
4827 certain image types, as documented in the following subsections):
4828
4829 @table @code
4830 @item :type @var{type}
4831 The image type.
4832 @ifnottex
4833 @xref{Image Formats}.
4834 @end ifnottex
4835 Every image descriptor must include this property.
4836
4837 @item :file @var{file}
4838 This says to load the image from file @var{file}. If @var{file} is
4839 not an absolute file name, it is expanded in @code{data-directory}.
4840
4841 @item :data @var{data}
4842 This specifies the raw image data. Each image descriptor must have
4843 either @code{:data} or @code{:file}, but not both.
4844
4845 For most image types, the value of a @code{:data} property should be a
4846 string containing the image data. Some image types do not support
4847 @code{:data}; for some others, @code{:data} alone is not enough, so
4848 you need to use other image properties along with @code{:data}. See
4849 the following subsections for details.
4850
4851 @item :margin @var{margin}
4852 This specifies how many pixels to add as an extra margin around the
4853 image. The value, @var{margin}, must be a non-negative number, or a
4854 pair @code{(@var{x} . @var{y})} of such numbers. If it is a pair,
4855 @var{x} specifies how many pixels to add horizontally, and @var{y}
4856 specifies how many pixels to add vertically. If @code{:margin} is not
4857 specified, the default is zero.
4858
4859 @item :ascent @var{ascent}
4860 This specifies the amount of the image's height to use for its
4861 ascent---that is, the part above the baseline. The value,
4862 @var{ascent}, must be a number in the range 0 to 100, or the symbol
4863 @code{center}.
4864
4865 If @var{ascent} is a number, that percentage of the image's height is
4866 used for its ascent.
4867
4868 If @var{ascent} is @code{center}, the image is vertically centered
4869 around a centerline which would be the vertical centerline of text drawn
4870 at the position of the image, in the manner specified by the text
4871 properties and overlays that apply to the image.
4872
4873 If this property is omitted, it defaults to 50.
4874
4875 @item :relief @var{relief}
4876 This adds a shadow rectangle around the image. The value,
4877 @var{relief}, specifies the width of the shadow lines, in pixels. If
4878 @var{relief} is negative, shadows are drawn so that the image appears
4879 as a pressed button; otherwise, it appears as an unpressed button.
4880
4881 @item :conversion @var{algorithm}
4882 This specifies a conversion algorithm that should be applied to the
4883 image before it is displayed; the value, @var{algorithm}, specifies
4884 which algorithm.
4885
4886 @table @code
4887 @item laplace
4888 @itemx emboss
4889 Specifies the Laplace edge detection algorithm, which blurs out small
4890 differences in color while highlighting larger differences. People
4891 sometimes consider this useful for displaying the image for a
4892 disabled button.
4893
4894 @item (edge-detection :matrix @var{matrix} :color-adjust @var{adjust})
4895 @cindex edge detection, images
4896 Specifies a general edge-detection algorithm. @var{matrix} must be
4897 either a nine-element list or a nine-element vector of numbers. A pixel
4898 at position @math{x/y} in the transformed image is computed from
4899 original pixels around that position. @var{matrix} specifies, for each
4900 pixel in the neighborhood of @math{x/y}, a factor with which that pixel
4901 will influence the transformed pixel; element @math{0} specifies the
4902 factor for the pixel at @math{x-1/y-1}, element @math{1} the factor for
4903 the pixel at @math{x/y-1} etc., as shown below:
4904 @iftex
4905 @tex
4906 $$\pmatrix{x-1/y-1 & x/y-1 & x+1/y-1 \cr
4907 x-1/y & x/y & x+1/y \cr
4908 x-1/y+1& x/y+1 & x+1/y+1 \cr}$$
4909 @end tex
4910 @end iftex
4911 @ifnottex
4912 @display
4913 (x-1/y-1 x/y-1 x+1/y-1
4914 x-1/y x/y x+1/y
4915 x-1/y+1 x/y+1 x+1/y+1)
4916 @end display
4917 @end ifnottex
4918
4919 The resulting pixel is computed from the color intensity of the color
4920 resulting from summing up the RGB values of surrounding pixels,
4921 multiplied by the specified factors, and dividing that sum by the sum
4922 of the factors' absolute values.
4923
4924 Laplace edge-detection currently uses a matrix of
4925 @iftex
4926 @tex
4927 $$\pmatrix{1 & 0 & 0 \cr
4928 0& 0 & 0 \cr
4929 0 & 0 & -1 \cr}$$
4930 @end tex
4931 @end iftex
4932 @ifnottex
4933 @display
4934 (1 0 0
4935 0 0 0
4936 0 0 -1)
4937 @end display
4938 @end ifnottex
4939
4940 Emboss edge-detection uses a matrix of
4941 @iftex
4942 @tex
4943 $$\pmatrix{ 2 & -1 & 0 \cr
4944 -1 & 0 & 1 \cr
4945 0 & 1 & -2 \cr}$$
4946 @end tex
4947 @end iftex
4948 @ifnottex
4949 @display
4950 ( 2 -1 0
4951 -1 0 1
4952 0 1 -2)
4953 @end display
4954 @end ifnottex
4955
4956 @item disabled
4957 Specifies transforming the image so that it looks disabled.
4958 @end table
4959
4960 @item :mask @var{mask}
4961 If @var{mask} is @code{heuristic} or @code{(heuristic @var{bg})}, build
4962 a clipping mask for the image, so that the background of a frame is
4963 visible behind the image. If @var{bg} is not specified, or if @var{bg}
4964 is @code{t}, determine the background color of the image by looking at
4965 the four corners of the image, assuming the most frequently occurring
4966 color from the corners is the background color of the image. Otherwise,
4967 @var{bg} must be a list @code{(@var{red} @var{green} @var{blue})}
4968 specifying the color to assume for the background of the image.
4969
4970 If @var{mask} is @code{nil}, remove a mask from the image, if it has
4971 one. Images in some formats include a mask which can be removed by
4972 specifying @code{:mask nil}.
4973
4974 @item :pointer @var{shape}
4975 This specifies the pointer shape when the mouse pointer is over this
4976 image. @xref{Pointer Shape}, for available pointer shapes.
4977
4978 @item :map @var{map}
4979 @cindex image maps
4980 This associates an image map of @dfn{hot spots} with this image.
4981
4982 An image map is an alist where each element has the format
4983 @code{(@var{area} @var{id} @var{plist})}. An @var{area} is specified
4984 as either a rectangle, a circle, or a polygon.
4985
4986 A rectangle is a cons
4987 @code{(rect . ((@var{x0} . @var{y0}) . (@var{x1} . @var{y1})))}
4988 which specifies the pixel coordinates of the upper left and bottom right
4989 corners of the rectangle area.
4990
4991 A circle is a cons
4992 @code{(circle . ((@var{x0} . @var{y0}) . @var{r}))}
4993 which specifies the center and the radius of the circle; @var{r} may
4994 be a float or integer.
4995
4996 A polygon is a cons
4997 @code{(poly . [@var{x0} @var{y0} @var{x1} @var{y1} ...])}
4998 where each pair in the vector describes one corner in the polygon.
4999
5000 When the mouse pointer lies on a hot-spot area of an image, the
5001 @var{plist} of that hot-spot is consulted; if it contains a @code{help-echo}
5002 property, that defines a tool-tip for the hot-spot, and if it contains
5003 a @code{pointer} property, that defines the shape of the mouse cursor when
5004 it is on the hot-spot.
5005 @xref{Pointer Shape}, for available pointer shapes.
5006
5007 When you click the mouse when the mouse pointer is over a hot-spot, an
5008 event is composed by combining the @var{id} of the hot-spot with the
5009 mouse event; for instance, @code{[area4 mouse-1]} if the hot-spot's
5010 @var{id} is @code{area4}.
5011 @end table
5012
5013 @defun image-mask-p spec &optional frame
5014 This function returns @code{t} if image @var{spec} has a mask bitmap.
5015 @var{frame} is the frame on which the image will be displayed.
5016 @var{frame} @code{nil} or omitted means to use the selected frame
5017 (@pxref{Input Focus}).
5018 @end defun
5019
5020 @node XBM Images
5021 @subsection XBM Images
5022 @cindex XBM
5023
5024 To use XBM format, specify @code{xbm} as the image type. This image
5025 format doesn't require an external library, so images of this type are
5026 always supported.
5027
5028 Additional image properties supported for the @code{xbm} image type are:
5029
5030 @table @code
5031 @item :foreground @var{foreground}
5032 The value, @var{foreground}, should be a string specifying the image
5033 foreground color, or @code{nil} for the default color. This color is
5034 used for each pixel in the XBM that is 1. The default is the frame's
5035 foreground color.
5036
5037 @item :background @var{background}
5038 The value, @var{background}, should be a string specifying the image
5039 background color, or @code{nil} for the default color. This color is
5040 used for each pixel in the XBM that is 0. The default is the frame's
5041 background color.
5042 @end table
5043
5044 If you specify an XBM image using data within Emacs instead of an
5045 external file, use the following three properties:
5046
5047 @table @code
5048 @item :data @var{data}
5049 The value, @var{data}, specifies the contents of the image.
5050 There are three formats you can use for @var{data}:
5051
5052 @itemize @bullet
5053 @item
5054 A vector of strings or bool-vectors, each specifying one line of the
5055 image. Do specify @code{:height} and @code{:width}.
5056
5057 @item
5058 A string containing the same byte sequence as an XBM file would contain.
5059 You must not specify @code{:height} and @code{:width} in this case,
5060 because omitting them is what indicates the data has the format of an
5061 XBM file. The file contents specify the height and width of the image.
5062
5063 @item
5064 A string or a bool-vector containing the bits of the image (plus perhaps
5065 some extra bits at the end that will not be used). It should contain at
5066 least @var{width} * @code{height} bits. In this case, you must specify
5067 @code{:height} and @code{:width}, both to indicate that the string
5068 contains just the bits rather than a whole XBM file, and to specify the
5069 size of the image.
5070 @end itemize
5071
5072 @item :width @var{width}
5073 The value, @var{width}, specifies the width of the image, in pixels.
5074
5075 @item :height @var{height}
5076 The value, @var{height}, specifies the height of the image, in pixels.
5077 @end table
5078
5079 @node XPM Images
5080 @subsection XPM Images
5081 @cindex XPM
5082
5083 To use XPM format, specify @code{xpm} as the image type. The
5084 additional image property @code{:color-symbols} is also meaningful with
5085 the @code{xpm} image type:
5086
5087 @table @code
5088 @item :color-symbols @var{symbols}
5089 The value, @var{symbols}, should be an alist whose elements have the
5090 form @code{(@var{name} . @var{color})}. In each element, @var{name} is
5091 the name of a color as it appears in the image file, and @var{color}
5092 specifies the actual color to use for displaying that name.
5093 @end table
5094
5095 @node PostScript Images
5096 @subsection PostScript Images
5097 @cindex postscript images
5098
5099 To use PostScript for an image, specify image type @code{postscript}.
5100 This works only if you have Ghostscript installed. You must always use
5101 these three properties:
5102
5103 @table @code
5104 @item :pt-width @var{width}
5105 The value, @var{width}, specifies the width of the image measured in
5106 points (1/72 inch). @var{width} must be an integer.
5107
5108 @item :pt-height @var{height}
5109 The value, @var{height}, specifies the height of the image in points
5110 (1/72 inch). @var{height} must be an integer.
5111
5112 @item :bounding-box @var{box}
5113 The value, @var{box}, must be a list or vector of four integers, which
5114 specifying the bounding box of the PostScript image, analogous to the
5115 @samp{BoundingBox} comment found in PostScript files.
5116
5117 @example
5118 %%BoundingBox: 22 171 567 738
5119 @end example
5120 @end table
5121
5122 @node ImageMagick Images
5123 @subsection ImageMagick Images
5124 @cindex ImageMagick images
5125 @cindex images, support for more formats
5126
5127 If you build Emacs with ImageMagick support, you can use the
5128 ImageMagick library to load many image formats (@pxref{File
5129 Conveniences,,, emacs, The GNU Emacs Manual}). The image type symbol
5130 for images loaded via ImageMagick is @code{imagemagick}, regardless of
5131 the actual underlying image format.
5132
5133 @defun imagemagick-types
5134 This function returns a list of image file extensions supported by the
5135 current ImageMagick installation. Each list element is a symbol
5136 representing an internal ImageMagick name for an image type, such as
5137 @code{BMP} for @file{.bmp} images.
5138 @end defun
5139
5140 @defopt imagemagick-enabled-types
5141 The value of this variable is a list of ImageMagick image types which
5142 Emacs may attempt to render using ImageMagick. Each list element
5143 should be one of the symbols in the list returned by
5144 @code{imagemagick-types}, or an equivalent string. Alternatively, a
5145 value of @code{t} enables ImageMagick for all possible image types.
5146 Regardless of the value of this variable,
5147 @code{imagemagick-types-inhibit} (see below) takes precedence.
5148 @end defopt
5149
5150 @defopt imagemagick-types-inhibit
5151 The value of this variable lists the ImageMagick image types which
5152 should never be rendered using ImageMagick, regardless of the value of
5153 @code{imagemagick-enabled-types}. A value of @code{t} disables
5154 ImageMagick entirely.
5155 @end defopt
5156
5157 @defvar image-format-suffixes
5158 This variable is an alist mapping image types to file name extensions.
5159 Emacs uses this in conjunction with the @code{:format} image property
5160 (see below) to give a hint to the ImageMagick library as to the type
5161 of an image. Each element has the form @code{(@var{type}
5162 @var{extension})}, where @var{type} is a symbol specifying an image
5163 content-type, and @var{extension} is a string that specifies the
5164 associated file name extension.
5165 @end defvar
5166
5167 Images loaded with ImageMagick support the following additional
5168 image descriptor properties:
5169
5170 @table @code
5171 @item :background @var{background}
5172 @var{background}, if non-@code{nil}, should be a string specifying a
5173 color, which is used as the image's background color if the image
5174 supports transparency. If the value is @code{nil}, it defaults to the
5175 frame's background color.
5176
5177 @item :width @var{width}, :height @var{height}
5178 The @code{:width} and @code{:height} keywords are used for scaling the
5179 image. If only one of them is specified, the other one will be
5180 calculated so as to preserve the aspect ratio. If both are specified,
5181 aspect ratio may not be preserved.
5182
5183 @item :max-width @var{max-width}, :max-height @var{max-height}
5184 The @code{:max-width} and @code{:max-height} keywords are used for
5185 scaling if the size of the image of the image exceeds these values.
5186 If @code{:width} is set it will have precedence over @code{max-width},
5187 and if @code{:height} is set it will have precedence over
5188 @code{max-height}, but you can otherwise mix these keywords as you
5189 wish. @code{:max-width} and @code{:max-height} will always preserve
5190 the aspect ratio.
5191
5192 @item :format @var{type}
5193 The value, @var{type}, should be a symbol specifying the type of the
5194 image data, as found in @code{image-format-suffixes}. This is used
5195 when the image does not have an associated file name, to provide a
5196 hint to ImageMagick to help it detect the image type.
5197
5198 @item :rotation @var{angle}
5199 Specifies a rotation angle in degrees.
5200
5201 @item :index @var{frame}
5202 @c Doesn't work: http://debbugs.gnu.org/7978
5203 @xref{Multi-Frame Images}.
5204 @end table
5205
5206 @node Other Image Types
5207 @subsection Other Image Types
5208 @cindex PBM
5209
5210 For PBM images, specify image type @code{pbm}. Color, gray-scale and
5211 monochromatic images are supported. For mono PBM images, two additional
5212 image properties are supported.
5213
5214 @table @code
5215 @item :foreground @var{foreground}
5216 The value, @var{foreground}, should be a string specifying the image
5217 foreground color, or @code{nil} for the default color. This color is
5218 used for each pixel in the PBM that is 1. The default is the frame's
5219 foreground color.
5220
5221 @item :background @var{background}
5222 The value, @var{background}, should be a string specifying the image
5223 background color, or @code{nil} for the default color. This color is
5224 used for each pixel in the PBM that is 0. The default is the frame's
5225 background color.
5226 @end table
5227
5228 @noindent
5229 The remaining image types that Emacs can support are:
5230
5231 @table @asis
5232 @item GIF
5233 Image type @code{gif}.
5234 Supports the @code{:index} property. @xref{Multi-Frame Images}.
5235
5236 @item JPEG
5237 Image type @code{jpeg}.
5238
5239 @item PNG
5240 Image type @code{png}.
5241
5242 @item SVG
5243 Image type @code{svg}.
5244
5245 @item TIFF
5246 Image type @code{tiff}.
5247 Supports the @code{:index} property. @xref{Multi-Frame Images}.
5248 @end table
5249
5250 @node Defining Images
5251 @subsection Defining Images
5252 @cindex define image
5253
5254 The functions @code{create-image}, @code{defimage} and
5255 @code{find-image} provide convenient ways to create image descriptors.
5256
5257 @defun create-image file-or-data &optional type data-p &rest props
5258 This function creates and returns an image descriptor which uses the
5259 data in @var{file-or-data}. @var{file-or-data} can be a file name or
5260 a string containing the image data; @var{data-p} should be @code{nil}
5261 for the former case, non-@code{nil} for the latter case.
5262
5263 The optional argument @var{type} is a symbol specifying the image type.
5264 If @var{type} is omitted or @code{nil}, @code{create-image} tries to
5265 determine the image type from the file's first few bytes, or else
5266 from the file's name.
5267
5268 The remaining arguments, @var{props}, specify additional image
5269 properties---for example,
5270
5271 @c ':heuristic-mask' is not documented?
5272 @example
5273 (create-image "foo.xpm" 'xpm nil :heuristic-mask t)
5274 @end example
5275
5276 The function returns @code{nil} if images of this type are not
5277 supported. Otherwise it returns an image descriptor.
5278 @end defun
5279
5280 @defmac defimage symbol specs &optional doc
5281 This macro defines @var{symbol} as an image name. The arguments
5282 @var{specs} is a list which specifies how to display the image.
5283 The third argument, @var{doc}, is an optional documentation string.
5284
5285 Each argument in @var{specs} has the form of a property list, and each
5286 one should specify at least the @code{:type} property and either the
5287 @code{:file} or the @code{:data} property. The value of @code{:type}
5288 should be a symbol specifying the image type, the value of
5289 @code{:file} is the file to load the image from, and the value of
5290 @code{:data} is a string containing the actual image data. Here is an
5291 example:
5292
5293 @example
5294 (defimage test-image
5295 ((:type xpm :file "~/test1.xpm")
5296 (:type xbm :file "~/test1.xbm")))
5297 @end example
5298
5299 @code{defimage} tests each argument, one by one, to see if it is
5300 usable---that is, if the type is supported and the file exists. The
5301 first usable argument is used to make an image descriptor which is
5302 stored in @var{symbol}.
5303
5304 If none of the alternatives will work, then @var{symbol} is defined
5305 as @code{nil}.
5306 @end defmac
5307
5308 @defun find-image specs
5309 This function provides a convenient way to find an image satisfying one
5310 of a list of image specifications @var{specs}.
5311
5312 Each specification in @var{specs} is a property list with contents
5313 depending on image type. All specifications must at least contain the
5314 properties @code{:type @var{type}} and either @w{@code{:file @var{file}}}
5315 or @w{@code{:data @var{data}}}, where @var{type} is a symbol specifying
5316 the image type, e.g., @code{xbm}, @var{file} is the file to load the
5317 image from, and @var{data} is a string containing the actual image data.
5318 The first specification in the list whose @var{type} is supported, and
5319 @var{file} exists, is used to construct the image specification to be
5320 returned. If no specification is satisfied, @code{nil} is returned.
5321
5322 The image is looked for in @code{image-load-path}.
5323 @end defun
5324
5325 @defvar image-load-path
5326 This variable's value is a list of locations in which to search for
5327 image files. If an element is a string or a variable symbol whose
5328 value is a string, the string is taken to be the name of a directory
5329 to search. If an element is a variable symbol whose value is a list,
5330 that is taken to be a list of directory names to search.
5331
5332 The default is to search in the @file{images} subdirectory of the
5333 directory specified by @code{data-directory}, then the directory
5334 specified by @code{data-directory}, and finally in the directories in
5335 @code{load-path}. Subdirectories are not automatically included in
5336 the search, so if you put an image file in a subdirectory, you have to
5337 supply the subdirectory name explicitly. For example, to find the
5338 image @file{images/foo/bar.xpm} within @code{data-directory}, you
5339 should specify the image as follows:
5340
5341 @example
5342 (defimage foo-image '((:type xpm :file "foo/bar.xpm")))
5343 @end example
5344 @end defvar
5345
5346 @defun image-load-path-for-library library image &optional path no-error
5347 This function returns a suitable search path for images used by the
5348 Lisp package @var{library}.
5349
5350 The function searches for @var{image} first using @code{image-load-path},
5351 excluding @file{@code{data-directory}/images}, and then in
5352 @code{load-path}, followed by a path suitable for @var{library}, which
5353 includes @file{../../etc/images} and @file{../etc/images} relative to
5354 the library file itself, and finally in
5355 @file{@code{data-directory}/images}.
5356
5357 Then this function returns a list of directories which contains first
5358 the directory in which @var{image} was found, followed by the value of
5359 @code{load-path}. If @var{path} is given, it is used instead of
5360 @code{load-path}.
5361
5362 If @var{no-error} is non-@code{nil} and a suitable path can't be
5363 found, don't signal an error. Instead, return a list of directories as
5364 before, except that @code{nil} appears in place of the image directory.
5365
5366 Here is an example of using @code{image-load-path-for-library}:
5367
5368 @example
5369 (defvar image-load-path) ; shush compiler
5370 (let* ((load-path (image-load-path-for-library
5371 "mh-e" "mh-logo.xpm"))
5372 (image-load-path (cons (car load-path)
5373 image-load-path)))
5374 (mh-tool-bar-folder-buttons-init))
5375 @end example
5376 @end defun
5377
5378 @node Showing Images
5379 @subsection Showing Images
5380 @cindex show image
5381
5382 You can use an image descriptor by setting up the @code{display}
5383 property yourself, but it is easier to use the functions in this
5384 section.
5385
5386 @defun insert-image image &optional string area slice
5387 This function inserts @var{image} in the current buffer at point. The
5388 value @var{image} should be an image descriptor; it could be a value
5389 returned by @code{create-image}, or the value of a symbol defined with
5390 @code{defimage}. The argument @var{string} specifies the text to put
5391 in the buffer to hold the image. If it is omitted or @code{nil},
5392 @code{insert-image} uses @code{" "} by default.
5393
5394 The argument @var{area} specifies whether to put the image in a margin.
5395 If it is @code{left-margin}, the image appears in the left margin;
5396 @code{right-margin} specifies the right margin. If @var{area} is
5397 @code{nil} or omitted, the image is displayed at point within the
5398 buffer's text.
5399
5400 The argument @var{slice} specifies a slice of the image to insert. If
5401 @var{slice} is @code{nil} or omitted the whole image is inserted.
5402 Otherwise, @var{slice} is a list @code{(@var{x} @var{y} @var{width}
5403 @var{height})} which specifies the @var{x} and @var{y} positions and
5404 @var{width} and @var{height} of the image area to insert. Integer
5405 values are in units of pixels. A floating-point number in the range
5406 0.0--1.0 stands for that fraction of the width or height of the entire
5407 image.
5408
5409 Internally, this function inserts @var{string} in the buffer, and gives
5410 it a @code{display} property which specifies @var{image}. @xref{Display
5411 Property}.
5412 @end defun
5413
5414 @cindex slice, image
5415 @cindex image slice
5416 @defun insert-sliced-image image &optional string area rows cols
5417 This function inserts @var{image} in the current buffer at point, like
5418 @code{insert-image}, but splits the image into @var{rows}x@var{cols}
5419 equally sized slices.
5420
5421 Emacs displays each slice as a
5422 separate image, and allows more intuitive scrolling up/down, instead of
5423 jumping up/down the entire image when paging through a buffer that
5424 displays (large) images.
5425 @end defun
5426
5427 @defun put-image image pos &optional string area
5428 This function puts image @var{image} in front of @var{pos} in the
5429 current buffer. The argument @var{pos} should be an integer or a
5430 marker. It specifies the buffer position where the image should appear.
5431 The argument @var{string} specifies the text that should hold the image
5432 as an alternative to the default.
5433
5434 The argument @var{image} must be an image descriptor, perhaps returned
5435 by @code{create-image} or stored by @code{defimage}.
5436
5437 The argument @var{area} specifies whether to put the image in a margin.
5438 If it is @code{left-margin}, the image appears in the left margin;
5439 @code{right-margin} specifies the right margin. If @var{area} is
5440 @code{nil} or omitted, the image is displayed at point within the
5441 buffer's text.
5442
5443 Internally, this function creates an overlay, and gives it a
5444 @code{before-string} property containing text that has a @code{display}
5445 property whose value is the image. (Whew!)
5446 @end defun
5447
5448 @defun remove-images start end &optional buffer
5449 This function removes images in @var{buffer} between positions
5450 @var{start} and @var{end}. If @var{buffer} is omitted or @code{nil},
5451 images are removed from the current buffer.
5452
5453 This removes only images that were put into @var{buffer} the way
5454 @code{put-image} does it, not images that were inserted with
5455 @code{insert-image} or in other ways.
5456 @end defun
5457
5458 @defun image-size spec &optional pixels frame
5459 @cindex size of image
5460 This function returns the size of an image as a pair
5461 @w{@code{(@var{width} . @var{height})}}. @var{spec} is an image
5462 specification. @var{pixels} non-@code{nil} means return sizes measured
5463 in pixels, otherwise return sizes measured in the default character size
5464 of @var{frame} (@pxref{Frame Font}). @var{frame} is the frame on which
5465 the image will be displayed. @var{frame} null or omitted means use the
5466 selected frame (@pxref{Input Focus}).
5467 @end defun
5468
5469 @defvar max-image-size
5470 This variable is used to define the maximum size of image that Emacs
5471 will load. Emacs will refuse to load (and display) any image that is
5472 larger than this limit.
5473
5474 If the value is an integer, it directly specifies the maximum
5475 image height and width, measured in pixels. If it is floating
5476 point, it specifies the maximum image height and width
5477 as a ratio to the frame height and width. If the value is
5478 non-numeric, there is no explicit limit on the size of images.
5479
5480 The purpose of this variable is to prevent unreasonably large images
5481 from accidentally being loaded into Emacs. It only takes effect the
5482 first time an image is loaded. Once an image is placed in the image
5483 cache, it can always be displayed, even if the value of
5484 @code{max-image-size} is subsequently changed (@pxref{Image Cache}).
5485 @end defvar
5486
5487 @node Multi-Frame Images
5488 @subsection Multi-Frame Images
5489 @cindex multi-frame images
5490
5491 @cindex animation
5492 @cindex image animation
5493 @cindex image frames
5494 Some image files can contain more than one image. We say that there
5495 are multiple ``frames'' in the image. At present, Emacs supports
5496 multiple frames for GIF, TIFF, and certain ImageMagick formats such as
5497 DJVM@.
5498
5499 The frames can be used either to represent multiple pages (this is
5500 usually the case with multi-frame TIFF files, for example), or to
5501 create animation (usually the case with multi-frame GIF files).
5502
5503 A multi-frame image has a property @code{:index}, whose value is an
5504 integer (counting from 0) that specifies which frame is being displayed.
5505
5506 @defun image-multi-frame-p image
5507 This function returns non-@code{nil} if @var{image} contains more than
5508 one frame. The actual return value is a cons @code{(@var{nimages}
5509 . @var{delay})}, where @var{nimages} is the number of frames and
5510 @var{delay} is the delay in seconds between them, or @code{nil}
5511 if the image does not specify a delay. Images that are intended to be
5512 animated usually specify a frame delay, whereas ones that are intended
5513 to be treated as multiple pages do not.
5514 @end defun
5515
5516 @defun image-current-frame image
5517 This function returns the index of the current frame number for
5518 @var{image}, counting from 0.
5519 @end defun
5520
5521 @defun image-show-frame image n &optional nocheck
5522 This function switches @var{image} to frame number @var{n}. It
5523 replaces a frame number outside the valid range with that of the end
5524 of the range, unless @var{nocheck} is non-@code{nil}. If @var{image}
5525 does not contain a frame with the specified number, the image displays
5526 as a hollow box.
5527 @end defun
5528
5529 @defun image-animate image &optional index limit
5530 This function animates @var{image}. The optional integer @var{index}
5531 specifies the frame from which to start (default 0). The optional
5532 argument @var{limit} controls the length of the animation. If omitted
5533 or @code{nil}, the image animates once only; if @code{t} it loops
5534 forever; if a number animation stops after that many seconds.
5535 @end defun
5536
5537 @vindex image-minimum-frame-delay
5538 @vindex image-default-frame-delay
5539 @noindent Animation operates by means of a timer. Note that Emacs imposes a
5540 minimum frame delay of 0.01 (@code{image-minimum-frame-delay}) seconds.
5541 If the image itself does not specify a delay, Emacs uses
5542 @code{image-default-frame-delay}.
5543
5544 @defun image-animate-timer image
5545 This function returns the timer responsible for animating @var{image},
5546 if there is one.
5547 @end defun
5548
5549
5550 @node Image Cache
5551 @subsection Image Cache
5552 @cindex image cache
5553
5554 Emacs caches images so that it can display them again more
5555 efficiently. When Emacs displays an image, it searches the image
5556 cache for an existing image specification @code{equal} to the desired
5557 specification. If a match is found, the image is displayed from the
5558 cache. Otherwise, Emacs loads the image normally.
5559
5560 @defun image-flush spec &optional frame
5561 This function removes the image with specification @var{spec} from the
5562 image cache of frame @var{frame}. Image specifications are compared
5563 using @code{equal}. If @var{frame} is @code{nil}, it defaults to the
5564 selected frame. If @var{frame} is @code{t}, the image is flushed on
5565 all existing frames.
5566
5567 In Emacs's current implementation, each graphical terminal possesses an
5568 image cache, which is shared by all the frames on that terminal
5569 (@pxref{Multiple Terminals}). Thus, refreshing an image in one frame
5570 also refreshes it in all other frames on the same terminal.
5571 @end defun
5572
5573 One use for @code{image-flush} is to tell Emacs about a change in an
5574 image file. If an image specification contains a @code{:file}
5575 property, the image is cached based on the file's contents when the
5576 image is first displayed. Even if the file subsequently changes,
5577 Emacs continues displaying the old version of the image. Calling
5578 @code{image-flush} flushes the image from the cache, forcing Emacs to
5579 re-read the file the next time it needs to display that image.
5580
5581 Another use for @code{image-flush} is for memory conservation. If
5582 your Lisp program creates a large number of temporary images over a
5583 period much shorter than @code{image-cache-eviction-delay} (see
5584 below), you can opt to flush unused images yourself, instead of
5585 waiting for Emacs to do it automatically.
5586
5587 @defun clear-image-cache &optional filter
5588 This function clears an image cache, removing all the images stored in
5589 it. If @var{filter} is omitted or @code{nil}, it clears the cache for
5590 the selected frame. If @var{filter} is a frame, it clears the cache
5591 for that frame. If @var{filter} is @code{t}, all image caches are
5592 cleared. Otherwise, @var{filter} is taken to be a file name, and all
5593 images associated with that file name are removed from all image
5594 caches.
5595 @end defun
5596
5597 If an image in the image cache has not been displayed for a specified
5598 period of time, Emacs removes it from the cache and frees the
5599 associated memory.
5600
5601 @defvar image-cache-eviction-delay
5602 This variable specifies the number of seconds an image can remain in
5603 the cache without being displayed. When an image is not displayed for
5604 this length of time, Emacs removes it from the image cache.
5605
5606 Under some circumstances, if the number of images in the cache grows
5607 too large, the actual eviction delay may be shorter than this.
5608
5609 If the value is @code{nil}, Emacs does not remove images from the cache
5610 except when you explicitly clear it. This mode can be useful for
5611 debugging.
5612 @end defvar
5613
5614 @node Buttons
5615 @section Buttons
5616 @cindex buttons in buffers
5617 @cindex clickable buttons in buffers
5618
5619 The Button package defines functions for inserting and manipulating
5620 @dfn{buttons} that can be activated with the mouse or via keyboard
5621 commands. These buttons are typically used for various kinds of
5622 hyperlinks.
5623
5624 A button is essentially a set of text or overlay properties,
5625 attached to a stretch of text in a buffer. These properties are
5626 called @dfn{button properties}. One of these properties, the
5627 @dfn{action property}, specifies a function which is called when the
5628 user invokes the button using the keyboard or the mouse. The action
5629 function may examine the button and use its other properties as
5630 desired.
5631
5632 In some ways, the Button package duplicates the functionality in the
5633 Widget package. @xref{Top, , Introduction, widget, The Emacs Widget
5634 Library}. The advantage of the Button package is that it is faster,
5635 smaller, and simpler to program. From the point of view of the user,
5636 the interfaces produced by the two packages are very similar.
5637
5638 @menu
5639 * Button Properties:: Button properties with special meanings.
5640 * Button Types:: Defining common properties for classes of buttons.
5641 * Making Buttons:: Adding buttons to Emacs buffers.
5642 * Manipulating Buttons:: Getting and setting properties of buttons.
5643 * Button Buffer Commands:: Buffer-wide commands and bindings for buttons.
5644 @end menu
5645
5646 @node Button Properties
5647 @subsection Button Properties
5648 @cindex button properties
5649
5650 Each button has an associated list of properties defining its
5651 appearance and behavior, and other arbitrary properties may be used
5652 for application specific purposes. The following properties have
5653 special meaning to the Button package:
5654
5655 @table @code
5656 @item action
5657 @kindex action @r{(button property)}
5658 The function to call when the user invokes the button, which is passed
5659 the single argument @var{button}. By default this is @code{ignore},
5660 which does nothing.
5661
5662 @item mouse-action
5663 @kindex mouse-action @r{(button property)}
5664 This is similar to @code{action}, and when present, will be used
5665 instead of @code{action} for button invocations resulting from
5666 mouse-clicks (instead of the user hitting @key{RET}). If not
5667 present, mouse-clicks use @code{action} instead.
5668
5669 @item face
5670 @kindex face @r{(button property)}
5671 This is an Emacs face controlling how buttons of this type are
5672 displayed; by default this is the @code{button} face.
5673
5674 @item mouse-face
5675 @kindex mouse-face @r{(button property)}
5676 This is an additional face which controls appearance during
5677 mouse-overs (merged with the usual button face); by default this is
5678 the usual Emacs @code{highlight} face.
5679
5680 @item keymap
5681 @kindex keymap @r{(button property)}
5682 The button's keymap, defining bindings active within the button
5683 region. By default this is the usual button region keymap, stored
5684 in the variable @code{button-map}, which defines @key{RET} and
5685 @key{mouse-2} to invoke the button.
5686
5687 @item type
5688 @kindex type @r{(button property)}
5689 The button type. @xref{Button Types}.
5690
5691 @item help-echo
5692 @kindex help-index @r{(button property)}
5693 A string displayed by the Emacs tool-tip help system; by default,
5694 @code{"mouse-2, RET: Push this button"}.
5695
5696 @item follow-link
5697 @kindex follow-link @r{(button property)}
5698 The follow-link property, defining how a @key{Mouse-1} click behaves
5699 on this button, @xref{Clickable Text}.
5700
5701 @item button
5702 @kindex button @r{(button property)}
5703 All buttons have a non-@code{nil} @code{button} property, which may be useful
5704 in finding regions of text that comprise buttons (which is what the
5705 standard button functions do).
5706 @end table
5707
5708 There are other properties defined for the regions of text in a
5709 button, but these are not generally interesting for typical uses.
5710
5711 @node Button Types
5712 @subsection Button Types
5713 @cindex button types
5714
5715 Every button has a @dfn{button type}, which defines default values
5716 for the button's properties. Button types are arranged in a
5717 hierarchy, with specialized types inheriting from more general types,
5718 so that it's easy to define special-purpose types of buttons for
5719 specific tasks.
5720
5721 @defun define-button-type name &rest properties
5722 Define a button type called @var{name} (a symbol).
5723 The remaining arguments
5724 form a sequence of @var{property value} pairs, specifying default
5725 property values for buttons with this type (a button's type may be set
5726 by giving it a @code{type} property when creating the button, using
5727 the @code{:type} keyword argument).
5728
5729 In addition, the keyword argument @code{:supertype} may be used to
5730 specify a button-type from which @var{name} inherits its default
5731 property values. Note that this inheritance happens only when
5732 @var{name} is defined; subsequent changes to a supertype are not
5733 reflected in its subtypes.
5734 @end defun
5735
5736 Using @code{define-button-type} to define default properties for
5737 buttons is not necessary---buttons without any specified type use the
5738 built-in button-type @code{button}---but it is encouraged, since
5739 doing so usually makes the resulting code clearer and more efficient.
5740
5741 @node Making Buttons
5742 @subsection Making Buttons
5743 @cindex making buttons
5744
5745 Buttons are associated with a region of text, using an overlay or
5746 text properties to hold button-specific information, all of which are
5747 initialized from the button's type (which defaults to the built-in
5748 button type @code{button}). Like all Emacs text, the appearance of
5749 the button is governed by the @code{face} property; by default (via
5750 the @code{face} property inherited from the @code{button} button-type)
5751 this is a simple underline, like a typical web-page link.
5752
5753 For convenience, there are two sorts of button-creation functions,
5754 those that add button properties to an existing region of a buffer,
5755 called @code{make-...button}, and those that also insert the button
5756 text, called @code{insert-...button}.
5757
5758 The button-creation functions all take the @code{&rest} argument
5759 @var{properties}, which should be a sequence of @var{property value}
5760 pairs, specifying properties to add to the button; see @ref{Button
5761 Properties}. In addition, the keyword argument @code{:type} may be
5762 used to specify a button-type from which to inherit other properties;
5763 see @ref{Button Types}. Any properties not explicitly specified
5764 during creation will be inherited from the button's type (if the type
5765 defines such a property).
5766
5767 The following functions add a button using an overlay
5768 (@pxref{Overlays}) to hold the button properties:
5769
5770 @defun make-button beg end &rest properties
5771 This makes a button from @var{beg} to @var{end} in the
5772 current buffer, and returns it.
5773 @end defun
5774
5775 @defun insert-button label &rest properties
5776 This insert a button with the label @var{label} at point,
5777 and returns it.
5778 @end defun
5779
5780 The following functions are similar, but using text properties
5781 (@pxref{Text Properties}) to hold the button properties. Such buttons
5782 do not add markers to the buffer, so editing in the buffer does not
5783 slow down if there is an extremely large numbers of buttons. However,
5784 if there is an existing face text property on the text (e.g., a face
5785 assigned by Font Lock mode), the button face may not be visible. Both
5786 of these functions return the starting position of the new button.
5787
5788 @defun make-text-button beg end &rest properties
5789 This makes a button from @var{beg} to @var{end} in the current buffer,
5790 using text properties.
5791 @end defun
5792
5793 @defun insert-text-button label &rest properties
5794 This inserts a button with the label @var{label} at point, using text
5795 properties.
5796 @end defun
5797
5798 @node Manipulating Buttons
5799 @subsection Manipulating Buttons
5800 @cindex manipulating buttons
5801
5802 These are functions for getting and setting properties of buttons.
5803 Often these are used by a button's invocation function to determine
5804 what to do.
5805
5806 Where a @var{button} parameter is specified, it means an object
5807 referring to a specific button, either an overlay (for overlay
5808 buttons), or a buffer-position or marker (for text property buttons).
5809 Such an object is passed as the first argument to a button's
5810 invocation function when it is invoked.
5811
5812 @defun button-start button
5813 Return the position at which @var{button} starts.
5814 @end defun
5815
5816 @defun button-end button
5817 Return the position at which @var{button} ends.
5818 @end defun
5819
5820 @defun button-get button prop
5821 Get the property of button @var{button} named @var{prop}.
5822 @end defun
5823
5824 @defun button-put button prop val
5825 Set @var{button}'s @var{prop} property to @var{val}.
5826 @end defun
5827
5828 @defun button-activate button &optional use-mouse-action
5829 Call @var{button}'s @code{action} property (i.e., invoke the function
5830 that is the value of that property, passing it the single argument
5831 @var{button}). If @var{use-mouse-action} is non-@code{nil}, try to
5832 invoke the button's @code{mouse-action} property instead of
5833 @code{action}; if the button has no @code{mouse-action} property, use
5834 @code{action} as normal.
5835 @end defun
5836
5837 @defun button-label button
5838 Return @var{button}'s text label.
5839 @end defun
5840
5841 @defun button-type button
5842 Return @var{button}'s button-type.
5843 @end defun
5844
5845 @defun button-has-type-p button type
5846 Return @code{t} if @var{button} has button-type @var{type}, or one of
5847 @var{type}'s subtypes.
5848 @end defun
5849
5850 @defun button-at pos
5851 Return the button at position @var{pos} in the current buffer, or
5852 @code{nil}. If the button at @var{pos} is a text property button, the
5853 return value is a marker pointing to @var{pos}.
5854 @end defun
5855
5856 @defun button-type-put type prop val
5857 Set the button-type @var{type}'s @var{prop} property to @var{val}.
5858 @end defun
5859
5860 @defun button-type-get type prop
5861 Get the property of button-type @var{type} named @var{prop}.
5862 @end defun
5863
5864 @defun button-type-subtype-p type supertype
5865 Return @code{t} if button-type @var{type} is a subtype of @var{supertype}.
5866 @end defun
5867
5868 @node Button Buffer Commands
5869 @subsection Button Buffer Commands
5870 @cindex button buffer commands
5871
5872 These are commands and functions for locating and operating on
5873 buttons in an Emacs buffer.
5874
5875 @code{push-button} is the command that a user uses to actually push
5876 a button, and is bound by default in the button itself to @key{RET}
5877 and to @key{mouse-2} using a local keymap in the button's overlay or
5878 text properties. Commands that are useful outside the buttons itself,
5879 such as @code{forward-button} and @code{backward-button} are
5880 additionally available in the keymap stored in
5881 @code{button-buffer-map}; a mode which uses buttons may want to use
5882 @code{button-buffer-map} as a parent keymap for its keymap.
5883
5884 If the button has a non-@code{nil} @code{follow-link} property, and
5885 @code{mouse-1-click-follows-link} is set, a quick @key{Mouse-1} click
5886 will also activate the @code{push-button} command.
5887 @xref{Clickable Text}.
5888
5889 @deffn Command push-button &optional pos use-mouse-action
5890 Perform the action specified by a button at location @var{pos}.
5891 @var{pos} may be either a buffer position or a mouse-event. If
5892 @var{use-mouse-action} is non-@code{nil}, or @var{pos} is a
5893 mouse-event (@pxref{Mouse Events}), try to invoke the button's
5894 @code{mouse-action} property instead of @code{action}; if the button
5895 has no @code{mouse-action} property, use @code{action} as normal.
5896 @var{pos} defaults to point, except when @code{push-button} is invoked
5897 interactively as the result of a mouse-event, in which case, the mouse
5898 event's position is used. If there's no button at @var{pos}, do
5899 nothing and return @code{nil}, otherwise return @code{t}.
5900 @end deffn
5901
5902 @deffn Command forward-button n &optional wrap display-message
5903 Move to the @var{n}th next button, or @var{n}th previous button if
5904 @var{n} is negative. If @var{n} is zero, move to the start of any
5905 button at point. If @var{wrap} is non-@code{nil}, moving past either
5906 end of the buffer continues from the other end. If
5907 @var{display-message} is non-@code{nil}, the button's help-echo string
5908 is displayed. Any button with a non-@code{nil} @code{skip} property
5909 is skipped over. Returns the button found.
5910 @end deffn
5911
5912 @deffn Command backward-button n &optional wrap display-message
5913 Move to the @var{n}th previous button, or @var{n}th next button if
5914 @var{n} is negative. If @var{n} is zero, move to the start of any
5915 button at point. If @var{wrap} is non-@code{nil}, moving past either
5916 end of the buffer continues from the other end. If
5917 @var{display-message} is non-@code{nil}, the button's help-echo string
5918 is displayed. Any button with a non-@code{nil} @code{skip} property
5919 is skipped over. Returns the button found.
5920 @end deffn
5921
5922 @defun next-button pos &optional count-current
5923 @defunx previous-button pos &optional count-current
5924 Return the next button after (for @code{next-button}) or before (for
5925 @code{previous-button}) position @var{pos} in the current buffer. If
5926 @var{count-current} is non-@code{nil}, count any button at @var{pos}
5927 in the search, instead of starting at the next button.
5928 @end defun
5929
5930 @node Abstract Display
5931 @section Abstract Display
5932 @cindex ewoc
5933 @cindex display, abstract
5934 @cindex display, arbitrary objects
5935 @cindex model/view/controller
5936 @cindex view part, model/view/controller
5937
5938 The Ewoc package constructs buffer text that represents a structure
5939 of Lisp objects, and updates the text to follow changes in that
5940 structure. This is like the ``view'' component in the
5941 ``model--view--controller'' design paradigm. Ewoc means ``Emacs's
5942 Widget for Object Collections''.
5943
5944 An @dfn{ewoc} is a structure that organizes information required to
5945 construct buffer text that represents certain Lisp data. The buffer
5946 text of the ewoc has three parts, in order: first, fixed @dfn{header}
5947 text; next, textual descriptions of a series of data elements (Lisp
5948 objects that you specify); and last, fixed @dfn{footer} text.
5949 Specifically, an ewoc contains information on:
5950
5951 @itemize @bullet
5952 @item
5953 The buffer which its text is generated in.
5954
5955 @item
5956 The text's start position in the buffer.
5957
5958 @item
5959 The header and footer strings.
5960
5961 @item
5962 @cindex node, ewoc
5963 @c or "@cindex node, abstract display"?
5964 A doubly-linked chain of @dfn{nodes}, each of which contains:
5965
5966 @itemize
5967 @item
5968 A @dfn{data element}, a single Lisp object.
5969
5970 @item
5971 Links to the preceding and following nodes in the chain.
5972 @end itemize
5973
5974 @item
5975 A @dfn{pretty-printer} function which is responsible for
5976 inserting the textual representation of a data
5977 element value into the current buffer.
5978 @end itemize
5979
5980 Typically, you define an ewoc with @code{ewoc-create}, and then pass
5981 the resulting ewoc structure to other functions in the Ewoc package to
5982 build nodes within it, and display it in the buffer. Once it is
5983 displayed in the buffer, other functions determine the correspondence
5984 between buffer positions and nodes, move point from one node's textual
5985 representation to another, and so forth. @xref{Abstract Display
5986 Functions}.
5987
5988 @cindex encapsulation, ewoc
5989 @c or "@cindex encapsulation, abstract display"?
5990 A node @dfn{encapsulates} a data element much the way a variable
5991 holds a value. Normally, encapsulation occurs as a part of adding a
5992 node to the ewoc. You can retrieve the data element value and place a
5993 new value in its place, like so:
5994
5995 @lisp
5996 (ewoc-data @var{node})
5997 @result{} value
5998
5999 (ewoc-set-data @var{node} @var{new-value})
6000 @result{} @var{new-value}
6001 @end lisp
6002
6003 @noindent
6004 You can also use, as the data element value, a Lisp object (list or
6005 vector) that is a container for the real value, or an index into
6006 some other structure. The example (@pxref{Abstract Display Example})
6007 uses the latter approach.
6008
6009 When the data changes, you will want to update the text in the
6010 buffer. You can update all nodes by calling @code{ewoc-refresh}, or
6011 just specific nodes using @code{ewoc-invalidate}, or all nodes
6012 satisfying a predicate using @code{ewoc-map}. Alternatively, you can
6013 delete invalid nodes using @code{ewoc-delete} or @code{ewoc-filter},
6014 and add new nodes in their place. Deleting a node from an ewoc deletes
6015 its associated textual description from buffer, as well.
6016
6017 @menu
6018 * Abstract Display Functions:: Functions in the Ewoc package.
6019 * Abstract Display Example:: Example of using Ewoc.
6020 @end menu
6021
6022 @node Abstract Display Functions
6023 @subsection Abstract Display Functions
6024
6025 In this subsection, @var{ewoc} and @var{node} stand for the
6026 structures described above (@pxref{Abstract Display}), while
6027 @var{data} stands for an arbitrary Lisp object used as a data element.
6028
6029 @defun ewoc-create pretty-printer &optional header footer nosep
6030 This constructs and returns a new ewoc, with no nodes (and thus no data
6031 elements). @var{pretty-printer} should be a function that takes one
6032 argument, a data element of the sort you plan to use in this ewoc, and
6033 inserts its textual description at point using @code{insert} (and never
6034 @code{insert-before-markers}, because that would interfere with the
6035 Ewoc package's internal mechanisms).
6036
6037 Normally, a newline is automatically inserted after the header,
6038 the footer and every node's textual description. If @var{nosep}
6039 is non-@code{nil}, no newline is inserted. This may be useful for
6040 displaying an entire ewoc on a single line, for example, or for
6041 making nodes invisible by arranging for @var{pretty-printer}
6042 to do nothing for those nodes.
6043
6044 An ewoc maintains its text in the buffer that is current when
6045 you create it, so switch to the intended buffer before calling
6046 @code{ewoc-create}.
6047 @end defun
6048
6049 @defun ewoc-buffer ewoc
6050 This returns the buffer where @var{ewoc} maintains its text.
6051 @end defun
6052
6053 @defun ewoc-get-hf ewoc
6054 This returns a cons cell @code{(@var{header} . @var{footer})}
6055 made from @var{ewoc}'s header and footer.
6056 @end defun
6057
6058 @defun ewoc-set-hf ewoc header footer
6059 This sets the header and footer of @var{ewoc} to the strings
6060 @var{header} and @var{footer}, respectively.
6061 @end defun
6062
6063 @defun ewoc-enter-first ewoc data
6064 @defunx ewoc-enter-last ewoc data
6065 These add a new node encapsulating @var{data}, putting it, respectively,
6066 at the beginning or end of @var{ewoc}'s chain of nodes.
6067 @end defun
6068
6069 @defun ewoc-enter-before ewoc node data
6070 @defunx ewoc-enter-after ewoc node data
6071 These add a new node encapsulating @var{data}, adding it to
6072 @var{ewoc} before or after @var{node}, respectively.
6073 @end defun
6074
6075 @defun ewoc-prev ewoc node
6076 @defunx ewoc-next ewoc node
6077 These return, respectively, the previous node and the next node of @var{node}
6078 in @var{ewoc}.
6079 @end defun
6080
6081 @defun ewoc-nth ewoc n
6082 This returns the node in @var{ewoc} found at zero-based index @var{n}.
6083 A negative @var{n} means count from the end. @code{ewoc-nth} returns
6084 @code{nil} if @var{n} is out of range.
6085 @end defun
6086
6087 @defun ewoc-data node
6088 This extracts the data encapsulated by @var{node} and returns it.
6089 @end defun
6090
6091 @defun ewoc-set-data node data
6092 This sets the data encapsulated by @var{node} to @var{data}.
6093 @end defun
6094
6095 @defun ewoc-locate ewoc &optional pos guess
6096 This determines the node in @var{ewoc} which contains point (or
6097 @var{pos} if specified), and returns that node. If @var{ewoc} has no
6098 nodes, it returns @code{nil}. If @var{pos} is before the first node,
6099 it returns the first node; if @var{pos} is after the last node, it returns
6100 the last node. The optional third arg @var{guess}
6101 should be a node that is likely to be near @var{pos}; this doesn't
6102 alter the result, but makes the function run faster.
6103 @end defun
6104
6105 @defun ewoc-location node
6106 This returns the start position of @var{node}.
6107 @end defun
6108
6109 @defun ewoc-goto-prev ewoc arg
6110 @defunx ewoc-goto-next ewoc arg
6111 These move point to the previous or next, respectively, @var{arg}th node
6112 in @var{ewoc}. @code{ewoc-goto-prev} does not move if it is already at
6113 the first node or if @var{ewoc} is empty, whereas @code{ewoc-goto-next}
6114 moves past the last node, returning @code{nil}. Excepting this special
6115 case, these functions return the node moved to.
6116 @end defun
6117
6118 @defun ewoc-goto-node ewoc node
6119 This moves point to the start of @var{node} in @var{ewoc}.
6120 @end defun
6121
6122 @defun ewoc-refresh ewoc
6123 This function regenerates the text of @var{ewoc}. It works by
6124 deleting the text between the header and the footer, i.e., all the
6125 data elements' representations, and then calling the pretty-printer
6126 function for each node, one by one, in order.
6127 @end defun
6128
6129 @defun ewoc-invalidate ewoc &rest nodes
6130 This is similar to @code{ewoc-refresh}, except that only @var{nodes} in
6131 @var{ewoc} are updated instead of the entire set.
6132 @end defun
6133
6134 @defun ewoc-delete ewoc &rest nodes
6135 This deletes each node in @var{nodes} from @var{ewoc}.
6136 @end defun
6137
6138 @defun ewoc-filter ewoc predicate &rest args
6139 This calls @var{predicate} for each data element in @var{ewoc} and
6140 deletes those nodes for which @var{predicate} returns @code{nil}.
6141 Any @var{args} are passed to @var{predicate}.
6142 @end defun
6143
6144 @defun ewoc-collect ewoc predicate &rest args
6145 This calls @var{predicate} for each data element in @var{ewoc}
6146 and returns a list of those elements for which @var{predicate}
6147 returns non-@code{nil}. The elements in the list are ordered
6148 as in the buffer. Any @var{args} are passed to @var{predicate}.
6149 @end defun
6150
6151 @defun ewoc-map map-function ewoc &rest args
6152 This calls @var{map-function} for each data element in @var{ewoc} and
6153 updates those nodes for which @var{map-function} returns non-@code{nil}.
6154 Any @var{args} are passed to @var{map-function}.
6155 @end defun
6156
6157 @node Abstract Display Example
6158 @subsection Abstract Display Example
6159
6160 Here is a simple example using functions of the ewoc package to
6161 implement a @dfn{color components} display, an area in a buffer that
6162 represents a vector of three integers (itself representing a 24-bit RGB
6163 value) in various ways.
6164
6165 @example
6166 (setq colorcomp-ewoc nil
6167 colorcomp-data nil
6168 colorcomp-mode-map nil
6169 colorcomp-labels ["Red" "Green" "Blue"])
6170
6171 (defun colorcomp-pp (data)
6172 (if data
6173 (let ((comp (aref colorcomp-data data)))
6174 (insert (aref colorcomp-labels data) "\t: #x"
6175 (format "%02X" comp) " "
6176 (make-string (ash comp -2) ?#) "\n"))
6177 (let ((cstr (format "#%02X%02X%02X"
6178 (aref colorcomp-data 0)
6179 (aref colorcomp-data 1)
6180 (aref colorcomp-data 2)))
6181 (samp " (sample text) "))
6182 (insert "Color\t: "
6183 (propertize samp 'face
6184 `(foreground-color . ,cstr))
6185 (propertize samp 'face
6186 `(background-color . ,cstr))
6187 "\n"))))
6188
6189 (defun colorcomp (color)
6190 "Allow fiddling with COLOR in a new buffer.
6191 The buffer is in Color Components mode."
6192 (interactive "sColor (name or #RGB or #RRGGBB): ")
6193 (when (string= "" color)
6194 (setq color "green"))
6195 (unless (color-values color)
6196 (error "No such color: %S" color))
6197 (switch-to-buffer
6198 (generate-new-buffer (format "originally: %s" color)))
6199 (kill-all-local-variables)
6200 (setq major-mode 'colorcomp-mode
6201 mode-name "Color Components")
6202 (use-local-map colorcomp-mode-map)
6203 (erase-buffer)
6204 (buffer-disable-undo)
6205 (let ((data (apply 'vector (mapcar (lambda (n) (ash n -8))
6206 (color-values color))))
6207 (ewoc (ewoc-create 'colorcomp-pp
6208 "\nColor Components\n\n"
6209 (substitute-command-keys
6210 "\n\\@{colorcomp-mode-map@}"))))
6211 (set (make-local-variable 'colorcomp-data) data)
6212 (set (make-local-variable 'colorcomp-ewoc) ewoc)
6213 (ewoc-enter-last ewoc 0)
6214 (ewoc-enter-last ewoc 1)
6215 (ewoc-enter-last ewoc 2)
6216 (ewoc-enter-last ewoc nil)))
6217 @end example
6218
6219 @cindex controller part, model/view/controller
6220 This example can be extended to be a color selection widget (in
6221 other words, the ``controller'' part of the ``model--view--controller''
6222 design paradigm) by defining commands to modify @code{colorcomp-data}
6223 and to finish the selection process, and a keymap to tie it all
6224 together conveniently.
6225
6226 @smallexample
6227 (defun colorcomp-mod (index limit delta)
6228 (let ((cur (aref colorcomp-data index)))
6229 (unless (= limit cur)
6230 (aset colorcomp-data index (+ cur delta)))
6231 (ewoc-invalidate
6232 colorcomp-ewoc
6233 (ewoc-nth colorcomp-ewoc index)
6234 (ewoc-nth colorcomp-ewoc -1))))
6235
6236 (defun colorcomp-R-more () (interactive) (colorcomp-mod 0 255 1))
6237 (defun colorcomp-G-more () (interactive) (colorcomp-mod 1 255 1))
6238 (defun colorcomp-B-more () (interactive) (colorcomp-mod 2 255 1))
6239 (defun colorcomp-R-less () (interactive) (colorcomp-mod 0 0 -1))
6240 (defun colorcomp-G-less () (interactive) (colorcomp-mod 1 0 -1))
6241 (defun colorcomp-B-less () (interactive) (colorcomp-mod 2 0 -1))
6242
6243 (defun colorcomp-copy-as-kill-and-exit ()
6244 "Copy the color components into the kill ring and kill the buffer.
6245 The string is formatted #RRGGBB (hash followed by six hex digits)."
6246 (interactive)
6247 (kill-new (format "#%02X%02X%02X"
6248 (aref colorcomp-data 0)
6249 (aref colorcomp-data 1)
6250 (aref colorcomp-data 2)))
6251 (kill-buffer nil))
6252
6253 (setq colorcomp-mode-map
6254 (let ((m (make-sparse-keymap)))
6255 (suppress-keymap m)
6256 (define-key m "i" 'colorcomp-R-less)
6257 (define-key m "o" 'colorcomp-R-more)
6258 (define-key m "k" 'colorcomp-G-less)
6259 (define-key m "l" 'colorcomp-G-more)
6260 (define-key m "," 'colorcomp-B-less)
6261 (define-key m "." 'colorcomp-B-more)
6262 (define-key m " " 'colorcomp-copy-as-kill-and-exit)
6263 m))
6264 @end smallexample
6265
6266 Note that we never modify the data in each node, which is fixed when the
6267 ewoc is created to be either @code{nil} or an index into the vector
6268 @code{colorcomp-data}, the actual color components.
6269
6270 @node Blinking
6271 @section Blinking Parentheses
6272 @cindex parenthesis matching
6273 @cindex blinking parentheses
6274 @cindex balancing parentheses
6275
6276 This section describes the mechanism by which Emacs shows a matching
6277 open parenthesis when the user inserts a close parenthesis.
6278
6279 @defvar blink-paren-function
6280 The value of this variable should be a function (of no arguments) to
6281 be called whenever a character with close parenthesis syntax is inserted.
6282 The value of @code{blink-paren-function} may be @code{nil}, in which
6283 case nothing is done.
6284 @end defvar
6285
6286 @defopt blink-matching-paren
6287 If this variable is @code{nil}, then @code{blink-matching-open} does
6288 nothing.
6289 @end defopt
6290
6291 @defopt blink-matching-paren-distance
6292 This variable specifies the maximum distance to scan for a matching
6293 parenthesis before giving up.
6294 @end defopt
6295
6296 @defopt blink-matching-delay
6297 This variable specifies the number of seconds to keep indicating the
6298 matching parenthesis. A fraction of a second often gives good
6299 results, but the default is 1, which works on all systems.
6300 @end defopt
6301
6302 @deffn Command blink-matching-open
6303 This function is the default value of @code{blink-paren-function}. It
6304 assumes that point follows a character with close parenthesis syntax
6305 and applies the appropriate effect momentarily to the matching opening
6306 character. If that character is not already on the screen, it
6307 displays the character's context in the echo area. To avoid long
6308 delays, this function does not search farther than
6309 @code{blink-matching-paren-distance} characters.
6310
6311 Here is an example of calling this function explicitly.
6312
6313 @smallexample
6314 @group
6315 (defun interactive-blink-matching-open ()
6316 "Indicate momentarily the start of parenthesized sexp before point."
6317 (interactive)
6318 @end group
6319 @group
6320 (let ((blink-matching-paren-distance
6321 (buffer-size))
6322 (blink-matching-paren t))
6323 (blink-matching-open)))
6324 @end group
6325 @end smallexample
6326 @end deffn
6327
6328 @node Character Display
6329 @section Character Display
6330
6331 This section describes how characters are actually displayed by
6332 Emacs. Typically, a character is displayed as a @dfn{glyph} (a
6333 graphical symbol which occupies one character position on the screen),
6334 whose appearance corresponds to the character itself. For example,
6335 the character @samp{a} (character code 97) is displayed as @samp{a}.
6336 Some characters, however, are displayed specially. For example, the
6337 formfeed character (character code 12) is usually displayed as a
6338 sequence of two glyphs, @samp{^L}, while the newline character
6339 (character code 10) starts a new screen line.
6340
6341 You can modify how each character is displayed by defining a
6342 @dfn{display table}, which maps each character code into a sequence of
6343 glyphs. @xref{Display Tables}.
6344
6345 @menu
6346 * Usual Display:: The usual conventions for displaying characters.
6347 * Display Tables:: What a display table consists of.
6348 * Active Display Table:: How Emacs selects a display table to use.
6349 * Glyphs:: How to define a glyph, and what glyphs mean.
6350 * Glyphless Chars:: How glyphless characters are drawn.
6351 @end menu
6352
6353 @node Usual Display
6354 @subsection Usual Display Conventions
6355
6356 Here are the conventions for displaying each character code (in the
6357 absence of a display table, which can override these
6358 @iftex
6359 conventions).
6360 @end iftex
6361 @ifnottex
6362 conventions; @pxref{Display Tables}).
6363 @end ifnottex
6364
6365 @cindex printable ASCII characters
6366 @itemize @bullet
6367 @item
6368 The @dfn{printable @acronym{ASCII} characters}, character codes 32
6369 through 126 (consisting of numerals, English letters, and symbols like
6370 @samp{#}) are displayed literally.
6371
6372 @item
6373 The tab character (character code 9) displays as whitespace stretching
6374 up to the next tab stop column. @xref{Text Display,,, emacs, The GNU
6375 Emacs Manual}. The variable @code{tab-width} controls the number of
6376 spaces per tab stop (see below).
6377
6378 @item
6379 The newline character (character code 10) has a special effect: it
6380 ends the preceding line and starts a new line.
6381
6382 @cindex ASCII control characters
6383 @item
6384 The non-printable @dfn{@acronym{ASCII} control characters}---character
6385 codes 0 through 31, as well as the @key{DEL} character (character code
6386 127)---display in one of two ways according to the variable
6387 @code{ctl-arrow}. If this variable is non-@code{nil} (the default),
6388 these characters are displayed as sequences of two glyphs, where the
6389 first glyph is @samp{^} (a display table can specify a glyph to use
6390 instead of @samp{^}); e.g., the @key{DEL} character is displayed as
6391 @samp{^?}.
6392
6393 If @code{ctl-arrow} is @code{nil}, these characters are displayed as
6394 octal escapes (see below).
6395
6396 This rule also applies to carriage return (character code 13), if that
6397 character appears in the buffer. But carriage returns usually do not
6398 appear in buffer text; they are eliminated as part of end-of-line
6399 conversion (@pxref{Coding System Basics}).
6400
6401 @cindex octal escapes
6402 @item
6403 @dfn{Raw bytes} are non-@acronym{ASCII} characters with codes 128
6404 through 255 (@pxref{Text Representations}). These characters display
6405 as @dfn{octal escapes}: sequences of four glyphs, where the first
6406 glyph is the @acronym{ASCII} code for @samp{\}, and the others are
6407 digit characters representing the character code in octal. (A display
6408 table can specify a glyph to use instead of @samp{\}.)
6409
6410 @item
6411 Each non-@acronym{ASCII} character with code above 255 is displayed
6412 literally, if the terminal supports it. If the terminal does not
6413 support it, the character is said to be @dfn{glyphless}, and it is
6414 usually displayed using a placeholder glyph. For example, if a
6415 graphical terminal has no font for a character, Emacs usually displays
6416 a box containing the character code in hexadecimal. @xref{Glyphless
6417 Chars}.
6418 @end itemize
6419
6420 The above display conventions apply even when there is a display
6421 table, for any character whose entry in the active display table is
6422 @code{nil}. Thus, when you set up a display table, you need only
6423 specify the characters for which you want special behavior.
6424
6425 The following variables affect how certain characters are displayed
6426 on the screen. Since they change the number of columns the characters
6427 occupy, they also affect the indentation functions. They also affect
6428 how the mode line is displayed; if you want to force redisplay of the
6429 mode line using the new values, call the function
6430 @code{force-mode-line-update} (@pxref{Mode Line Format}).
6431
6432 @defopt ctl-arrow
6433 @cindex control characters in display
6434 This buffer-local variable controls how control characters are
6435 displayed. If it is non-@code{nil}, they are displayed as a caret
6436 followed by the character: @samp{^A}. If it is @code{nil}, they are
6437 displayed as octal escapes: a backslash followed by three octal
6438 digits, as in @samp{\001}.
6439 @end defopt
6440
6441 @defopt tab-width
6442 The value of this buffer-local variable is the spacing between tab
6443 stops used for displaying tab characters in Emacs buffers. The value
6444 is in units of columns, and the default is 8. Note that this feature
6445 is completely independent of the user-settable tab stops used by the
6446 command @code{tab-to-tab-stop}. @xref{Indent Tabs}.
6447 @end defopt
6448
6449 @node Display Tables
6450 @subsection Display Tables
6451
6452 @cindex display table
6453 A display table is a special-purpose char-table
6454 (@pxref{Char-Tables}), with @code{display-table} as its subtype, which
6455 is used to override the usual character display conventions. This
6456 section describes how to make, inspect, and assign elements to a
6457 display table object.
6458
6459 @defun make-display-table
6460 This creates and returns a display table. The table initially has
6461 @code{nil} in all elements.
6462 @end defun
6463
6464 The ordinary elements of the display table are indexed by character
6465 codes; the element at index @var{c} says how to display the character
6466 code @var{c}. The value should be @code{nil} (which means to display
6467 the character @var{c} according to the usual display conventions;
6468 @pxref{Usual Display}), or a vector of glyph codes (which means to
6469 display the character @var{c} as those glyphs; @pxref{Glyphs}).
6470
6471 @strong{Warning:} if you use the display table to change the display
6472 of newline characters, the whole buffer will be displayed as one long
6473 line.
6474
6475 The display table also has six @dfn{extra slots} which serve special
6476 purposes. Here is a table of their meanings; @code{nil} in any slot
6477 means to use the default for that slot, as stated below.
6478
6479 @table @asis
6480 @item 0
6481 The glyph for the end of a truncated screen line (the default for this
6482 is @samp{$}). @xref{Glyphs}. On graphical terminals, Emacs uses
6483 arrows in the fringes to indicate truncation, so the display table has
6484 no effect.
6485
6486 @item 1
6487 The glyph for the end of a continued line (the default is @samp{\}).
6488 On graphical terminals, Emacs uses curved arrows in the fringes to
6489 indicate continuation, so the display table has no effect.
6490
6491 @item 2
6492 The glyph for indicating a character displayed as an octal character
6493 code (the default is @samp{\}).
6494
6495 @item 3
6496 The glyph for indicating a control character (the default is @samp{^}).
6497
6498 @item 4
6499 A vector of glyphs for indicating the presence of invisible lines (the
6500 default is @samp{...}). @xref{Selective Display}.
6501
6502 @item 5
6503 The glyph used to draw the border between side-by-side windows (the
6504 default is @samp{|}). @xref{Splitting Windows}. This takes effect only
6505 when there are no scroll bars; if scroll bars are supported and in use,
6506 a scroll bar separates the two windows.
6507 @end table
6508
6509 For example, here is how to construct a display table that mimics
6510 the effect of setting @code{ctl-arrow} to a non-@code{nil} value
6511 (@pxref{Glyphs}, for the function @code{make-glyph-code}):
6512
6513 @example
6514 (setq disptab (make-display-table))
6515 (dotimes (i 32)
6516 (or (= i ?\t)
6517 (= i ?\n)
6518 (aset disptab i
6519 (vector (make-glyph-code ?^ 'escape-glyph)
6520 (make-glyph-code (+ i 64) 'escape-glyph)))))
6521 (aset disptab 127
6522 (vector (make-glyph-code ?^ 'escape-glyph)
6523 (make-glyph-code ?? 'escape-glyph)))))
6524 @end example
6525
6526 @defun display-table-slot display-table slot
6527 This function returns the value of the extra slot @var{slot} of
6528 @var{display-table}. The argument @var{slot} may be a number from 0 to
6529 5 inclusive, or a slot name (symbol). Valid symbols are
6530 @code{truncation}, @code{wrap}, @code{escape}, @code{control},
6531 @code{selective-display}, and @code{vertical-border}.
6532 @end defun
6533
6534 @defun set-display-table-slot display-table slot value
6535 This function stores @var{value} in the extra slot @var{slot} of
6536 @var{display-table}. The argument @var{slot} may be a number from 0 to
6537 5 inclusive, or a slot name (symbol). Valid symbols are
6538 @code{truncation}, @code{wrap}, @code{escape}, @code{control},
6539 @code{selective-display}, and @code{vertical-border}.
6540 @end defun
6541
6542 @defun describe-display-table display-table
6543 This function displays a description of the display table
6544 @var{display-table} in a help buffer.
6545 @end defun
6546
6547 @deffn Command describe-current-display-table
6548 This command displays a description of the current display table in a
6549 help buffer.
6550 @end deffn
6551
6552 @node Active Display Table
6553 @subsection Active Display Table
6554 @cindex active display table
6555
6556 Each window can specify a display table, and so can each buffer.
6557 The window's display table, if there is one, takes precedence over the
6558 buffer's display table. If neither exists, Emacs tries to use the
6559 standard display table; if that is @code{nil}, Emacs uses the usual
6560 character display conventions (@pxref{Usual Display}).
6561
6562 Note that display tables affect how the mode line is displayed, so
6563 if you want to force redisplay of the mode line using a new display
6564 table, call @code{force-mode-line-update} (@pxref{Mode Line Format}).
6565
6566 @defun window-display-table &optional window
6567 This function returns @var{window}'s display table, or @code{nil} if
6568 there is none. The default for @var{window} is the selected window.
6569 @end defun
6570
6571 @defun set-window-display-table window table
6572 This function sets the display table of @var{window} to @var{table}.
6573 The argument @var{table} should be either a display table or
6574 @code{nil}.
6575 @end defun
6576
6577 @defvar buffer-display-table
6578 This variable is automatically buffer-local in all buffers; its value
6579 specifies the buffer's display table. If it is @code{nil}, there is
6580 no buffer display table.
6581 @end defvar
6582
6583 @defvar standard-display-table
6584 The value of this variable is the standard display table, which is
6585 used when Emacs is displaying a buffer in a window with neither a
6586 window display table nor a buffer display table defined, or when Emacs
6587 is outputting text to the standard output or error streams. Although its
6588 default is typically @code{nil}, in an interactive session if the
6589 terminal cannot display curved quotes, its default maps curved quotes
6590 to ASCII approximations. @xref{Keys in Documentation}.
6591 @end defvar
6592
6593 The @file{disp-table} library defines several functions for changing
6594 the standard display table.
6595
6596 @node Glyphs
6597 @subsection Glyphs
6598 @cindex glyph
6599
6600 @cindex glyph code
6601 A @dfn{glyph} is a graphical symbol which occupies a single
6602 character position on the screen. Each glyph is represented in Lisp
6603 as a @dfn{glyph code}, which specifies a character and optionally a
6604 face to display it in (@pxref{Faces}). The main use of glyph codes is
6605 as the entries of display tables (@pxref{Display Tables}). The
6606 following functions are used to manipulate glyph codes:
6607
6608 @defun make-glyph-code char &optional face
6609 This function returns a glyph code representing char @var{char} with
6610 face @var{face}. If @var{face} is omitted or @code{nil}, the glyph
6611 uses the default face; in that case, the glyph code is an integer. If
6612 @var{face} is non-@code{nil}, the glyph code is not necessarily an
6613 integer object.
6614 @end defun
6615
6616 @defun glyph-char glyph
6617 This function returns the character of glyph code @var{glyph}.
6618 @end defun
6619
6620 @defun glyph-face glyph
6621 This function returns face of glyph code @var{glyph}, or @code{nil} if
6622 @var{glyph} uses the default face.
6623 @end defun
6624
6625 @ifnottex
6626 You can set up a @dfn{glyph table} to change how glyph codes are
6627 actually displayed on text terminals. This feature is semi-obsolete;
6628 use @code{glyphless-char-display} instead (@pxref{Glyphless Chars}).
6629
6630 @defvar glyph-table
6631 The value of this variable, if non-@code{nil}, is the current glyph
6632 table. It takes effect only on character terminals; on graphical
6633 displays, all glyphs are displayed literally. The glyph table should
6634 be a vector whose @var{g}th element specifies how to display glyph
6635 code @var{g}, where @var{g} is the glyph code for a glyph whose face
6636 is unspecified. Each element should be one of the following:
6637
6638 @table @asis
6639 @item @code{nil}
6640 Display this glyph literally.
6641
6642 @item a string
6643 Display this glyph by sending the specified string to the terminal.
6644
6645 @item a glyph code
6646 Display the specified glyph code instead.
6647 @end table
6648
6649 Any integer glyph code greater than or equal to the length of the
6650 glyph table is displayed literally.
6651 @end defvar
6652 @end ifnottex
6653
6654 @node Glyphless Chars
6655 @subsection Glyphless Character Display
6656 @cindex glyphless characters
6657
6658 @dfn{Glyphless characters} are characters which are displayed in a
6659 special way, e.g., as a box containing a hexadecimal code, instead of
6660 being displayed literally. These include characters which are
6661 explicitly defined to be glyphless, as well as characters for which
6662 there is no available font (on a graphical display), and characters
6663 which cannot be encoded by the terminal's coding system (on a text
6664 terminal).
6665
6666 @defvar glyphless-char-display
6667 The value of this variable is a char-table which defines glyphless
6668 characters and how they are displayed. Each entry must be one of the
6669 following display methods:
6670
6671 @table @asis
6672 @item @code{nil}
6673 Display the character in the usual way.
6674
6675 @item @code{zero-width}
6676 Don't display the character.
6677
6678 @item @code{thin-space}
6679 Display a thin space, 1-pixel wide on graphical displays, or
6680 1-character wide on text terminals.
6681
6682 @item @code{empty-box}
6683 Display an empty box.
6684
6685 @item @code{hex-code}
6686 Display a box containing the Unicode codepoint of the character, in
6687 hexadecimal notation.
6688
6689 @item an @acronym{ASCII} string
6690 Display a box containing that string. The string should contain at
6691 most 6 @acronym{ASCII} characters.
6692
6693 @item a cons cell @code{(@var{graphical} . @var{text})}
6694 Display with @var{graphical} on graphical displays, and with
6695 @var{text} on text terminals. Both @var{graphical} and @var{text}
6696 must be one of the display methods described above.
6697 @end table
6698
6699 @noindent
6700 The @code{thin-space}, @code{empty-box}, @code{hex-code}, and
6701 @acronym{ASCII} string display methods are drawn with the
6702 @code{glyphless-char} face. On text terminals, a box is emulated by
6703 square brackets, @samp{[]}.
6704
6705 The char-table has one extra slot, which determines how to display any
6706 character that cannot be displayed with any available font, or cannot
6707 be encoded by the terminal's coding system. Its value should be one
6708 of the above display methods, except @code{zero-width} or a cons cell.
6709
6710 If a character has a non-@code{nil} entry in an active display table,
6711 the display table takes effect; in this case, Emacs does not consult
6712 @code{glyphless-char-display} at all.
6713 @end defvar
6714
6715 @defopt glyphless-char-display-control
6716 This user option provides a convenient way to set
6717 @code{glyphless-char-display} for groups of similar characters. Do
6718 not set its value directly from Lisp code; the value takes effect only
6719 via a custom @code{:set} function (@pxref{Variable Definitions}),
6720 which updates @code{glyphless-char-display}.
6721
6722 Its value should be an alist of elements @code{(@var{group}
6723 . @var{method})}, where @var{group} is a symbol specifying a group of
6724 characters, and @var{method} is a symbol specifying how to display
6725 them.
6726
6727 @var{group} should be one of the following:
6728
6729 @table @code
6730 @item c0-control
6731 @acronym{ASCII} control characters @code{U+0000} to @code{U+001F},
6732 excluding the newline and tab characters (normally displayed as escape
6733 sequences like @samp{^A}; @pxref{Text Display,, How Text Is Displayed,
6734 emacs, The GNU Emacs Manual}).
6735
6736 @item c1-control
6737 Non-@acronym{ASCII}, non-printing characters @code{U+0080} to
6738 @code{U+009F} (normally displayed as octal escape sequences like
6739 @samp{\230}).
6740
6741 @item format-control
6742 Characters of Unicode General Category [Cf], such as @samp{U+200E}
6743 (Left-to-Right Mark), but excluding characters that have graphic
6744 images, such as @samp{U+00AD} (Soft Hyphen).
6745
6746 @item no-font
6747 Characters for there is no suitable font, or which cannot be encoded
6748 by the terminal's coding system.
6749 @end table
6750
6751 @c FIXME: this can also be 'acronym', but that's not currently
6752 @c completely implemented; it applies only to the format-control
6753 @c group, and only works if the acronym is in 'char-acronym-table'.
6754 The @var{method} symbol should be one of @code{zero-width},
6755 @code{thin-space}, @code{empty-box}, or @code{hex-code}. These have
6756 the same meanings as in @code{glyphless-char-display}, above.
6757 @end defopt
6758
6759 @node Beeping
6760 @section Beeping
6761 @cindex bell
6762
6763 This section describes how to make Emacs ring the bell (or blink the
6764 screen) to attract the user's attention. Be conservative about how
6765 often you do this; frequent bells can become irritating. Also be
6766 careful not to use just beeping when signaling an error is more
6767 appropriate (@pxref{Errors}).
6768
6769 @defun ding &optional do-not-terminate
6770 @cindex keyboard macro termination
6771 This function beeps, or flashes the screen (see @code{visible-bell} below).
6772 It also terminates any keyboard macro currently executing unless
6773 @var{do-not-terminate} is non-@code{nil}.
6774 @end defun
6775
6776 @defun beep &optional do-not-terminate
6777 This is a synonym for @code{ding}.
6778 @end defun
6779
6780 @defopt visible-bell
6781 This variable determines whether Emacs should flash the screen to
6782 represent a bell. Non-@code{nil} means yes, @code{nil} means no.
6783 This is effective on graphical displays, and on text terminals
6784 provided the terminal's Termcap entry defines the visible bell
6785 capability (@samp{vb}).
6786 @end defopt
6787
6788 @defvar ring-bell-function
6789 If this is non-@code{nil}, it specifies how Emacs should ring the
6790 bell. Its value should be a function of no arguments. If this is
6791 non-@code{nil}, it takes precedence over the @code{visible-bell}
6792 variable.
6793 @end defvar
6794
6795 @node Window Systems
6796 @section Window Systems
6797
6798 Emacs works with several window systems, most notably the X Window
6799 System. Both Emacs and X use the term ``window'', but use it
6800 differently. An Emacs frame is a single window as far as X is
6801 concerned; the individual Emacs windows are not known to X at all.
6802
6803 @defvar window-system
6804 This terminal-local variable tells Lisp programs what window system
6805 Emacs is using for displaying the frame. The possible values are
6806
6807 @table @code
6808 @item x
6809 @cindex X Window System
6810 Emacs is displaying the frame using X.
6811 @item w32
6812 Emacs is displaying the frame using native MS-Windows GUI.
6813 @item ns
6814 Emacs is displaying the frame using the Nextstep interface (used on
6815 GNUstep and Mac OS X).
6816 @item pc
6817 Emacs is displaying the frame using MS-DOS direct screen writes.
6818 @item nil
6819 Emacs is displaying the frame on a character-based terminal.
6820 @end table
6821 @end defvar
6822
6823 @defvar initial-window-system
6824 This variable holds the value of @code{window-system} used for the
6825 first frame created by Emacs during startup. (When Emacs is invoked
6826 with the @option{--daemon} option, it does not create any initial
6827 frames, so @code{initial-window-system} is @code{nil}, except on
6828 MS-Windows, where it is still @code{w32}. @xref{Initial Options,
6829 daemon,, emacs, The GNU Emacs Manual}.)
6830 @end defvar
6831
6832 @defun window-system &optional frame
6833 This function returns a symbol whose name tells what window system is
6834 used for displaying @var{frame} (which defaults to the currently
6835 selected frame). The list of possible symbols it returns is the same
6836 one documented for the variable @code{window-system} above.
6837 @end defun
6838
6839 Do @emph{not} use @code{window-system} and
6840 @code{initial-window-system} as predicates or boolean flag variables,
6841 if you want to write code that works differently on text terminals and
6842 graphic displays. That is because @code{window-system} is not a good
6843 indicator of Emacs capabilities on a given display type. Instead, use
6844 @code{display-graphic-p} or any of the other @code{display-*-p}
6845 predicates described in @ref{Display Feature Testing}.
6846
6847 @node Bidirectional Display
6848 @section Bidirectional Display
6849 @cindex bidirectional display
6850 @cindex right-to-left text
6851
6852 Emacs can display text written in scripts, such as Arabic, Farsi,
6853 and Hebrew, whose natural ordering for horizontal text display runs
6854 from right to left. Furthermore, segments of Latin script and digits
6855 embedded in right-to-left text are displayed left-to-right, while
6856 segments of right-to-left script embedded in left-to-right text
6857 (e.g., Arabic or Hebrew text in comments or strings in a program
6858 source file) are appropriately displayed right-to-left. We call such
6859 mixtures of left-to-right and right-to-left text @dfn{bidirectional
6860 text}. This section describes the facilities and options for editing
6861 and displaying bidirectional text.
6862
6863 @cindex logical order
6864 @cindex reading order
6865 @cindex visual order
6866 @cindex unicode bidirectional algorithm
6867 @cindex UBA
6868 @cindex bidirectional reordering
6869 @cindex reordering, of bidirectional text
6870 Text is stored in Emacs buffers and strings in @dfn{logical} (or
6871 @dfn{reading}) order, i.e., the order in which a human would read
6872 each character. In right-to-left and bidirectional text, the order in
6873 which characters are displayed on the screen (called @dfn{visual
6874 order}) is not the same as logical order; the characters' screen
6875 positions do not increase monotonically with string or buffer
6876 position. In performing this @dfn{bidirectional reordering}, Emacs
6877 follows the Unicode Bidirectional Algorithm (a.k.a.@: @acronym{UBA}),
6878 which is described in Annex #9 of the Unicode standard
6879 (@url{http://www.unicode.org/reports/tr9/}). Emacs provides a ``Full
6880 Bidirectionality'' class implementation of the @acronym{UBA},
6881 consistent with the requirements of the Unicode Standard v8.0.
6882
6883 @defvar bidi-display-reordering
6884 If the value of this buffer-local variable is non-@code{nil} (the
6885 default), Emacs performs bidirectional reordering for display. The
6886 reordering affects buffer text, as well as display strings and overlay
6887 strings from text and overlay properties in the buffer (@pxref{Overlay
6888 Properties}, and @pxref{Display Property}). If the value is
6889 @code{nil}, Emacs does not perform bidirectional reordering in the
6890 buffer.
6891
6892 The default value of @code{bidi-display-reordering} controls the
6893 reordering of strings which are not directly supplied by a buffer,
6894 including the text displayed in mode lines (@pxref{Mode Line Format})
6895 and header lines (@pxref{Header Lines}).
6896 @end defvar
6897
6898 @cindex unibyte buffers, and bidi reordering
6899 Emacs never reorders the text of a unibyte buffer, even if
6900 @code{bidi-display-reordering} is non-@code{nil} in the buffer. This
6901 is because unibyte buffers contain raw bytes, not characters, and thus
6902 lack the directionality properties required for reordering.
6903 Therefore, to test whether text in a buffer will be reordered for
6904 display, it is not enough to test the value of
6905 @code{bidi-display-reordering} alone. The correct test is this:
6906
6907 @example
6908 (if (and enable-multibyte-characters
6909 bidi-display-reordering)
6910 ;; Buffer is being reordered for display
6911 )
6912 @end example
6913
6914 However, unibyte display and overlay strings @emph{are} reordered if
6915 their parent buffer is reordered. This is because plain-@sc{ascii}
6916 strings are stored by Emacs as unibyte strings. If a unibyte display
6917 or overlay string includes non-@sc{ascii} characters, these characters
6918 are assumed to have left-to-right direction.
6919
6920 @cindex display properties, and bidi reordering of text
6921 Text covered by @code{display} text properties, by overlays with
6922 @code{display} properties whose value is a string, and by any other
6923 properties that replace buffer text, is treated as a single unit when
6924 it is reordered for display. That is, the entire chunk of text
6925 covered by these properties is reordered together. Moreover, the
6926 bidirectional properties of the characters in such a chunk of text are
6927 ignored, and Emacs reorders them as if they were replaced with a
6928 single character @code{U+FFFC}, known as the @dfn{Object Replacement
6929 Character}. This means that placing a display property over a portion
6930 of text may change the way that the surrounding text is reordered for
6931 display. To prevent this unexpected effect, always place such
6932 properties on text whose directionality is identical with text that
6933 surrounds it.
6934
6935 @cindex base direction of a paragraph
6936 Each paragraph of bidirectional text has a @dfn{base direction},
6937 either right-to-left or left-to-right. Left-to-right paragraphs are
6938 displayed beginning at the left margin of the window, and are
6939 truncated or continued when the text reaches the right margin.
6940 Right-to-left paragraphs are displayed beginning at the right margin,
6941 and are continued or truncated at the left margin.
6942
6943 By default, Emacs determines the base direction of each paragraph by
6944 looking at the text at its beginning. The precise method of
6945 determining the base direction is specified by the @acronym{UBA}; in a
6946 nutshell, the first character in a paragraph that has an explicit
6947 directionality determines the base direction of the paragraph.
6948 However, sometimes a buffer may need to force a certain base direction
6949 for its paragraphs. For example, buffers containing program source
6950 code should force all paragraphs to be displayed left-to-right. You
6951 can use following variable to do this:
6952
6953 @defvar bidi-paragraph-direction
6954 If the value of this buffer-local variable is the symbol
6955 @code{right-to-left} or @code{left-to-right}, all paragraphs in the
6956 buffer are assumed to have that specified direction. Any other value
6957 is equivalent to @code{nil} (the default), which means to determine
6958 the base direction of each paragraph from its contents.
6959
6960 @cindex @code{prog-mode}, and @code{bidi-paragraph-direction}
6961 Modes for program source code should set this to @code{left-to-right}.
6962 Prog mode does this by default, so modes derived from Prog mode do not
6963 need to set this explicitly (@pxref{Basic Major Modes}).
6964 @end defvar
6965
6966 @defun current-bidi-paragraph-direction &optional buffer
6967 This function returns the paragraph direction at point in the named
6968 @var{buffer}. The returned value is a symbol, either
6969 @code{left-to-right} or @code{right-to-left}. If @var{buffer} is
6970 omitted or @code{nil}, it defaults to the current buffer. If the
6971 buffer-local value of the variable @code{bidi-paragraph-direction} is
6972 non-@code{nil}, the returned value will be identical to that value;
6973 otherwise, the returned value reflects the paragraph direction
6974 determined dynamically by Emacs. For buffers whose value of
6975 @code{bidi-display-reordering} is @code{nil} as well as unibyte
6976 buffers, this function always returns @code{left-to-right}.
6977 @end defun
6978
6979 @cindex visual-order cursor motion
6980 Sometimes there's a need to move point in strict visual order,
6981 either to the left or to the right of its current screen position.
6982 Emacs provides a primitive to do that.
6983
6984 @defun move-point-visually direction
6985 This function moves point of the currently selected window to the
6986 buffer position that appears immediately to the right or to the left
6987 of point on the screen. If @var{direction} is positive, point will
6988 move one screen position to the right, otherwise it will move one
6989 screen position to the left. Note that, depending on the surrounding
6990 bidirectional context, this could potentially move point many buffer
6991 positions away. If invoked at the end of a screen line, the function
6992 moves point to the rightmost or leftmost screen position of the next
6993 or previous screen line, as appropriate for the value of
6994 @var{direction}.
6995
6996 The function returns the new buffer position as its value.
6997 @end defun
6998
6999 @cindex layout on display, and bidirectional text
7000 @cindex jumbled display of bidirectional text
7001 @cindex concatenating bidirectional strings
7002 Bidirectional reordering can have surprising and unpleasant effects
7003 when two strings with bidirectional content are juxtaposed in a
7004 buffer, or otherwise programmatically concatenated into a string of
7005 text. A typical problematic case is when a buffer consists of
7006 sequences of text fields separated by whitespace or punctuation
7007 characters, like Buffer Menu mode or Rmail Summary Mode. Because the
7008 punctuation characters used as separators have @dfn{weak
7009 directionality}, they take on the directionality of surrounding text.
7010 As result, a numeric field that follows a field with bidirectional
7011 content can be displayed @emph{to the left} of the preceding field,
7012 messing up the expected layout. There are several ways to avoid this
7013 problem:
7014
7015 @itemize @minus
7016 @item
7017 Append the special character @code{U+200E}, LEFT-TO-RIGHT MARK, or
7018 @acronym{LRM}, to the end of each field that may have bidirectional
7019 content, or prepend it to the beginning of the following field. The
7020 function @code{bidi-string-mark-left-to-right}, described below, comes
7021 in handy for this purpose. (In a right-to-left paragraph, use
7022 @code{U+200F}, RIGHT-TO-LEFT MARK, or @acronym{RLM}, instead.) This
7023 is one of the solutions recommended by the UBA.
7024
7025 @item
7026 Include the tab character in the field separator. The tab character
7027 plays the role of @dfn{segment separator} in bidirectional reordering,
7028 causing the text on either side to be reordered separately.
7029
7030 @cindex @code{space} display spec, and bidirectional text
7031 @item
7032 Separate fields with a @code{display} property or overlay with a
7033 property value of the form @code{(space . PROPS)} (@pxref{Specified
7034 Space}). Emacs treats this display specification as a @dfn{paragraph
7035 separator}, and reorders the text on either side separately.
7036 @end itemize
7037
7038 @defun bidi-string-mark-left-to-right string
7039 This function returns its argument @var{string}, possibly modified,
7040 such that the result can be safely concatenated with another string,
7041 or juxtaposed with another string in a buffer, without disrupting the
7042 relative layout of this string and the next one on display. If the
7043 string returned by this function is displayed as part of a
7044 left-to-right paragraph, it will always appear on display to the left
7045 of the text that follows it. The function works by examining the
7046 characters of its argument, and if any of those characters could cause
7047 reordering on display, the function appends the @acronym{LRM}
7048 character to the string. The appended @acronym{LRM} character is made
7049 invisible by giving it an @code{invisible} text property of @code{t}
7050 (@pxref{Invisible Text}).
7051 @end defun
7052
7053 The reordering algorithm uses the bidirectional properties of the
7054 characters stored as their @code{bidi-class} property
7055 (@pxref{Character Properties}). Lisp programs can change these
7056 properties by calling the @code{put-char-code-property} function.
7057 However, doing this requires a thorough understanding of the
7058 @acronym{UBA}, and is therefore not recommended. Any changes to the
7059 bidirectional properties of a character have global effect: they
7060 affect all Emacs frames and windows.
7061
7062 Similarly, the @code{mirroring} property is used to display the
7063 appropriate mirrored character in the reordered text. Lisp programs
7064 can affect the mirrored display by changing this property. Again, any
7065 such changes affect all of Emacs display.
7066
7067 @cindex overriding bidirectional properties
7068 @cindex directional overrides
7069 @cindex LRO
7070 @cindex RLO
7071 The bidirectional properties of characters can be overridden by
7072 inserting into the text special directional control characters,
7073 LEFT-TO-RIGHT OVERRIDE (@acronym{LRO}) and RIGHT-TO-LEFT OVERRIDE
7074 (@acronym{RLO}). Any characters between a @acronym{RLO} and the
7075 following newline or POP DIRECTIONAL FORMATTING (@acronym{PDF})
7076 control character, whichever comes first, will be displayed as if they
7077 were strong right-to-left characters, i.e.@: they will be reversed on
7078 display. Similarly, any characters between @acronym{LRO} and
7079 @acronym{PDF} or newline will display as if they were strong
7080 left-to-right, and will @emph{not} be reversed even if they are strong
7081 right-to-left characters.
7082
7083 @cindex phishing using directional overrides
7084 @cindex malicious use of directional overrides
7085 These overrides are useful when you want to make some text
7086 unaffected by the reordering algorithm, and instead directly control
7087 the display order. But they can also be used for malicious purposes,
7088 known as @dfn{phishing}. Specifically, a URL on a Web page or a link
7089 in an email message can be manipulated to make its visual appearance
7090 unrecognizable, or similar to some popular benign location, while the
7091 real location, interpreted by a browser in the logical order, is very
7092 different.
7093
7094 Emacs provides a primitive that applications can use to detect
7095 instances of text whose bidirectional properties were overridden so as
7096 to make a left-to-right character display as if it were a
7097 right-to-left character, or vise versa.
7098
7099 @defun bidi-find-overridden-directionality from to &optional object
7100 This function looks at the text of the specified @var{object} between
7101 positions @var{from} (inclusive) and @var{to} (exclusive), and returns
7102 the first position where it finds a strong left-to-right character
7103 whose directional properties were forced to display the character as
7104 right-to-left, or for a strong right-to-left character that was forced
7105 to display as left-to-right. If it finds no such characters in the
7106 specified region of text, it returns @code{nil}.
7107
7108 The optional argument @var{object} specifies which text to search, and
7109 defaults to the current buffer. If @var{object} is non-@code{nil}, it
7110 can be some other buffer, or it can be a string or a window. If it is
7111 a string, the function searches that string. If it is a window, the
7112 function searches the buffer displayed in that window. If a buffer
7113 whose text you want to examine is displayed in some window, we
7114 recommend to specify it by that window, rather than pass the buffer to
7115 the function. This is because telling the function about the window
7116 allows it to correctly account for window-specific overlays, which
7117 might change the result of the function if some text in the buffer is
7118 covered by overlays.
7119 @end defun
7120
7121 @cindex copying bidirectional text, preserve visual order
7122 @cindex visual order, preserve when copying bidirectional text
7123 When text that includes mixed right-to-left and left-to-right
7124 characters and bidirectional controls is copied into a different
7125 location, it can change its visual appearance, and also can affect the
7126 visual appearance of the surrounding text at destination. This is
7127 because reordering of bidirectional text specified by the
7128 @acronym{UBA} has non-trivial context-dependent effects both on the
7129 copied text and on the text at copy destination that will surround it.
7130
7131 Sometimes, a Lisp program may need to preserve the exact visual
7132 appearance of the copied text at destination, and of the text that
7133 surrounds the copy. Lisp programs can use the following function to
7134 achieve that effect.
7135
7136 @defun buffer-substring-with-bidi-context start end &optional no-properties
7137 This function works similar to @code{buffer-substring} (@pxref{Buffer
7138 Contents}), but it prepends and appends to the copied text bidi
7139 directional control characters necessary to preserve the visual
7140 appearance of the text when it is inserted at another place. Optional
7141 argument @var{no-properties}, if non-@code{nil}, means remove the text
7142 properties from the copy of the text.
7143 @end defun